giao an anh 7

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.01 MB, 266 trang )

(1)The first semester Week 1 Preparing date: 24/8/2017 Teaching date: /8/2017 Period 1: Consolidation I. Objectives: - After the lesson, students will review the main contents of the lessons which are learned in class 6 : The simple present tense, the present continuous tense, near future, wh- questions, comparative and superlative of short adjectives. 1. Language content - Vocabulary: review -Grammar: Tenses,comparative and superlative of short adjectives - Structure: forms of the verbs,comparative and superlative of short adjectives 2.Skills: Listing, speaking and writing. II. Teaching methods : Eliciting, pairworks, groupworks, ask and answer III. Teaching aids : books , chalk , board IV. Produres I. The tenses of verbs 1. The present simple tense. * Tobe: am, is, are (+) I am = I’m (-) I am not = I’m not (?) Am I…….? We We We You are You are not Are You ………? They They They He He He She is She is not Is She ……….? It It It * Ordinary verbs : (+) I (-) I We + V( without To ) We + Don’t + V You You They They He He She + Vs(es) She + Doesn’t +V It It (?). I We Does Do You + V ? They 2. The present continuous tense: (+) S + am / is / are + Ving . (-) S + am / is / are + not + Ving.. He She It. +V. ?.

(2) (?) Am / is / are + S + Ving ? 3. Near future : (+) S + am / is / are + going to + V. (-) S + am / is / are + not + going to + V. (?) Am / is / are + S + going to + V ? II. Wh- questions : * What : - What’s your name ? => My name is An. What’s her name ? => Her name is Hoa . - What do you do? => I am a teacher . What does he do ? => He is a doctor . * Where : Where do you live? => I live on Nguyen Du street . Where does she live ? => She lives at 135 Hang Bai Street. * How many + Ns . How many students are there in your class? ………..tables ………………? * What time / When What time do you usually get up ? When do you do your homework? * How : - How are you ? => I’m fine, thanks. - How do you go to school every day ? => I go to school by bike . * How old : How old are you ? * Why? Why does he have bad marks? * Which : Which shirt do you like : red or blue? * Who : Who is Mrs Lan talking to? III. Comparative and superlative of short adjectives : a. Comparative: S1 + tobe + adj + er + than + S2. EX: She is taller than me . b. Superlative : S + tobe + the + adj + est ………… EX: He is the tallest in my class . IV. Practice : Ask Ss to do exercises , then the teacher corrects them . Exercise 1: Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. 1. My brother ( clean ) …….his floor in his room now, He ( clean ) …….it everyday. 2. They ( meet ) ……..us next year. 3. It usually ( not rain )……… in the rainy season. 4. I ( not go ) …….to school on Sunday ..

(3) 5. Listen! I think the telephone ( ring ) …………. Exercise 2 : Make questions for underlined words. 1. Mr Quang lives on Hung Vuong street . 2. Her new friends come from Autralia. 3. There are 13.6 million people in Mexico city . 4. Nam usually has lunch at 11:30. 5. Hoa is going to play badminton with her friend. Exercise 3 : Put the correct form of the adjective in bracket.A 1. The country is ………….than the city .( quiet ) 2. Minh’s house is the………….. to the town.( near ) 3. Which is the ………………city in your country ? ( large ) 4. Hambledom isn’t ……………than London. ( pretty ) 5. The town isn’t clean. The country is ……………( clean) V. Homework : Review and prepare unit one (A1,2) *Comments:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………… Unit 1 : back to school (5 Lessons). Aims. Language Focus. Unit Allocation. -Greet people -Introduce others -Ask for and give personal information -Ask about transportation and distances -Question words -Identify quantifier Lesson 1: A1+2 Lesson 2 : A3+4+5+6+Remember Lesson 3 :B1+2+3 Lesson 4 : B4+5 Lesson 5 : B6+7+Remember. Preparing date: 24/8/2017 Teaching date: /8/2017 UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL Period 2 : Lesson 1 : A- Friends ( A1,2 ) I. Objectives: After the lesson, students will review the greetings and introduce themselves . They will practice 4 skills : Listening, speaking, reading and writing. 1. Language content: - Vocabulary: - Nice to meet you . – Just fine/ not bad - How is everything? - Pretty good./ so am I. - Grammar:.

(4) The present simple tense. 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting, pairwork, groupwork, ask and answer . III. Teaching aids : Textbook, tape, cassette. IV. Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I. Warm up :5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game called slap the board. - 2 groups play game. T reads the questions => Ss slap the answers . - Listen. a. What’s your name? Goodbye Yes, I am b. How are you today? c. What class are you in? d. Goodbye. Very well, e. Are you a new student? thanks - Demonstrate the group which wins the game. II. New activities : 34’ a) Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Introduce some situations: + Nice to see/ meet you . + Nice to see / meet you again. + So am I. - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape. - Ask Ss to read in pairs. - Call on some pairs to roleplay the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct the mistake. - Ask Ss to look at the asnwers then work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and asnwer the questions in front of the class. - Correct then give the correct answers. b) Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 3 and introduce the picture. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation . c) Listen. Complete the dialogues.. Class 7A. My name is Hoa. - Listen and write down. - Read in chorus and individually. - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write down. - Look at the picture and listen. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Complete the dialogues..

(5) - Ask Ss to complete the dialogues in part 4 - Explain some new phrases: + How is everything ? + Just fine. + Pretty good . - Have Ss complete the dialogues. - Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners. - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers . a.+ How are you? + Pretty good. + How about you ? + Not bad. + Me too. b. + How is everything? + Ok. How are you today? +Just fine. + So am I. - Have Ss roleplay the completed dialogues in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogues in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. d) Ask Ss to look at 4 pictures in part 5. - Ask Ss about the people in these pictures . Who are they? What are they doing ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape then write the letters of the dialogues in the order they hear . - Play the tape for Ss. - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and ask them to check their answers . - Correct and give correct answers . 1-C 2-B 3- D 4-A - Ask Ss to base on the picture and make the dialogues. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. III. Consolidation:3’ - Have Ss work in pairs making a dialogue. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the. - Listen and write down.. - Complete the dialogues individually. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Copy down .. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Answer the questions. - Listen to the tape and write the order of the pictures . - Listen to the tape . - Give the answers . - Listen again and check the answers - Copy down. - Make dialogues in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class..

(6) class. - Remark. IV . Homework:3’ - Write homework. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each word. - Complete the dialogue in part 4 in exercise book. Do exercise 1,2 in workbook. - Prepare part A2. *Teacher’s comments:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 25/8/2017 Teaching date: /2017 UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Period 3: Lesson 2 : A- Friends ( A3+4+5+6+Remember) A. Objectives: - After the lesson, ss can practice greeting people, introducing themselves. 1. Language content: - Vocabulary :Pretty. - Grammar:Pretty good,how is everything?,Just fine, not bad. 2. Skills: 4 skills. II. Technique: Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids : Textbook, cassette, tape, pictures. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up :5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game. - Play a game in 2 groups. S C H O O L D T T B I G H N U N C L E A E D U J I T P I E A S V N P R 2 groups take part in the game to N E W E U Y F find out the words which have been T N E R A P Q learnt. Keywords: School, old, big, happy, uncle, new, - Clap hands. friend, live, student, parent. - Demonstrate the group which wins the game. II. Presentation: 15’ A-3: Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Look at the picture and listen..

(7) - Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 3 and introduce the picture. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation . III. Practice:20’ A-4: Listen. Complete the dialogues. - Ask Ss to complete the dialogues in part 4 - Explain some new phrases: + How is everything ? + Just fine. + Pretty good . - Have Ss complete the dialogues. - Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners. - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers . a.+ How are you? + Pretty good. + How about you ? + Not bad. + Me too. b. + How is everything? + Ok. How are you today? +Just fine. + So am I. - Have Ss role play the completed dialogues in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogues in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. IV. Consolidation:3’ - Ask Ss to look at 4 pictures in part 5. - Ask Ss about the people in these pictures . Who are they? What are they doing ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape then write the letters of the dialogues in the order they hear. - Play the tape for Ss.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Complete the dialogues. - Listen and write down.. Complete the dialogues individually. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Copy down .. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Answer the questions.. - Listen to the tape and write the order of the pictures ..

(8) - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and ask them to check their answers . - Correct and give correct answers . 1-C 2-B 3- D 4-A - Ask Ss to base on the picture and make the dialogues. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. V. Homework:2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each word. - Complete the dialogue in part 4 in exercise book. Do exercise 1,2 in workbook. - Prepare part B.. - Listen to the tape . - Give the answers . - Listen again and check the answers - Copy down. - Make dialogues in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Write homework.. * Teacher’s comments …………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………….

(9) Week 2 Preparing date:25/8/2015 Teaching date: 31/8/2015 Period 4: UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson 3: B- Names and addresses( B1,2,3) I.Objectives - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about personal information such as: name, age, address… 1. Language content: - Vocabulary: - Family name (n) - Middle name (n ) - Address (n) - Grammar. - The simple present tense. - Structure: What’s your family name? What’s your middle name? 2. Skills: 4 skills. II.Methods: Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, casstte, sub-board..

(10) IV. Procedures: Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities I. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game called:Noughts and Crosses - Play a game in 2 groups. . You 54 Quang Trung Hoa 13 Street Her mother Linh 19 Hung Vuong. Your father 40 Nam. Le Loi street Grandmother 60. - Have Ss ask and answer about the information in the grids. - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game. II. Presentation: 15’ B-1: Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Introduce the situation of the dialogue, then explain some new words. + Family name (n) : ( the first name ) + Middle name (n) : + Address (n) : ( where you live) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at their books and listen to the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in pairs: one asks and one asnwers. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct. - Ask and answer the questions. EX: S1: How old are you? S2: I’m 13. - Listen and write. - Guess the meanings.. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practie in front of the class.. - Work in pairs. -Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Copy down..

(11) answers: a. She is talking to Mrs Lien. b. Her family name is Pham. c. Her middle name is Thi. d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. III. Practice: 18’ - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs. + Nam – Nguyen – 15 – 32 Nguyen Du street. + Hoa – Pham – 12 – THD street. + Minh – Tran – 13 – Da Nang. + Thuy – Bui – 14 – LHP street. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. B-2: Write . Complete this dialogue. - Introduce the situation of part 2. - Ask Ss to complete the dialogue . - Ask them to exchange the result with their partner. - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers: Who- Who – What/which – Where – Where – How. - Call on some pairs to read the completed dialogue aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. IV. Consolidation :5’ B-3: - Have Ss ask the partner questions then complete the form. - Ask Ss to give the questions for the information. - Make model with a student: EX: What’s your name? How old are you? Which grade are you in? What’s your school’s name? or Which school do you study at? Where do you live? - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the. - Practice in pairs using the cues.. - Practice in front of the class.. - Listen. - Complete the dialogue. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Copy down.. -Practice reading the dialogue.. - Ask the partner and complete the form. - Give the questions. - A student answers the teacher’questions.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class..

(12) class. - Remark. V. Homework: :2’ - Complete the form in the exercisebook. - Do exercise 1,2 at page 5,6 in workbook. - Prepare part B4,5.. - Write homework.. *Comments:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date:26/8/2015 Teaching date: 01/9/2015 Period 5 : UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson 4: B – Names and addresses (B4,5) I.Objectives - By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about distances. Practice listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. 1. Language content: Structure : How far is it from ………to ……….? It’s about ………. 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, cassette, tape, pictures. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare - Play a game in 2 groups. - Ask Ss to find out the words in order to ask and prepositions. -Have Ss play in 2 groups. W H E R E. W W B Y F. W H A T R. H E O O O. Y N N W M. - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game.. Where, who, what, why, how, when. on, at, by, from, to..

(13) II. Presentation : 15’ B-4: Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ask Ss some questions such as: + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? => Then lead in new structure: + How far is it from your house to school? => It’s about one kilometer. - Have Ss make sentences with new structure. - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape. - Ask them to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss some questions: + Where does Hoa live? + Is it far from school? + How does she get there? III. Practice :17’ B-5: Ask and answer with a partner. - Have Ss look at 4 pictures in part 5. - Ask them to practice in pairs asking and answering about distances . EX: How far is it from your house to the market? It’s about one kilometer. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. IV.Consolidation : 6’ - Give some given cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs. + Market / 2 km + Post office / 700 meters + School / 1 km + Bus stop / 5oo meters - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Have Ss make a dialogue based on the dialogue between Nam and Hoa.. - Answer T’s questions.. - Listen and write down.. - Make sentences . - Look at the book and listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front the class.. - Answer teacher’s questions.. - Look at 4 pictures in the book. - Practice in pairs .. - Practice in front of the class.. - Work in pairs.. - Practice in front of the class. - Make a dialogue..

(14) - Call on some pairs to practice. V. Homework: 2’ - Write part 5 in the exercisebook. - Do exercise4,5 at page 6,7 in workbook. - Prepare part B6,7.. - Practice in front of the class. - Write homework.. *Comments:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 26/8/2015 Teaching date: 04/9/2015 Period 6 : UNIT 1: BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson 5: B- Names and addresses (6,7,Remember) I.Objectives - The students will continue to practice asking and answering about distances. Practice listening and speaking skills. 1. Language content: Review the structure : How far is it from…….to ……..? It’s about …………. 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions about themselves. - Answer teacher’s questions. EX: What’s your name? How old are you? Where do you live? How far is it from your house to school? How do you go to school? - Remark and give marks. II. Presentation :17’ B-6: Listen and write. - Write new lesson. How far is it ? Write the four distances. - Introduce the situation of the lesson. - Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 6. - Listen. - Have Ss call the names of the places. - Look at the picture..

(15) - Ask Ss some questions such as: + Is Lan’s house near or far from school? + Is Lan’s house near the market/ the post office/ the theater? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape then find out the distance between the places. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.. - Call the names of the places. - Answer T’s questions.. - Listen to the tape.. - Find out 4 distances. - Exchange the results with the partners. - Call on some Ss to give the results in front of - Give the results. the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check their - Listen to the tape and check. answers. - Correct and give the correct answers: a. School to Lan’s house : 300m b. Lan’s house to the post offfice : 700m c. School to the movie theater : 3km d. Movie theater to the post office : 2km - Have Ss practice asking and answering the - Practice asking and answering distance between the places. - Correct the mistake. III. Practice : 18’ B-7: A survey: - Ask Ss to look at the form in part 7. - Look at the form in part 7. - Introduce the aim of this part: Ask their - Listen. classmates some information then fill in the form. - Give the questions for the -Have Ss give the questions for the information. information. - Make model with a student: - Answer T’s questions. + What’s your name? + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? + How far is it from your house to school? - Have Ss work in pairs. - Work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class. class. IV. Consolidation : 3’ - Ask Ss to base on the information and write a - Write a short passage. short passage about their partner. EX: My friend is……..He/She lives at……….. He/ She goes to school by………It’s.

(16) about…….. from……….to…….. - Call on one student to go to the board and - Write on the board and read write, some Ss read aloud. aloud. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. * Remember: - Ask Ss to look at the remember and practice in - Work in pairs. pairs, using the questions in the box. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class. class. - Correct if necessary. V. Homework: 2’ - Write part 6 in the exercisebook. - Write homework. -Make questions and answers in part remember. - Prepare unit 2- A1,2,3. Comments:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION (6 Lessons). Aims. Language Focus. -Ask for and give number and personal information -Make arrangement -Talk about future plans -Future simple tense -Ordinal number. Lesson 1 : A1+2+3 Lesson 2 : A4+5 Unit Allocation Lesson 3 : A6+7+Remember Lesson 4 : B1+2+3 Lesson 5 : B4+5 Lesson 6 : B6+7+8+9+Remember Preparing date:2/9/2015 Teaching date: 8/9/2015 Week 3 Unit 2 : personal information Period 7: LESSON 1 : TELEPHONE NUMBERS (A1, 2,3) I.Objectives 1.Language contents: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give telephone numbers and further practice in addresses. They continue to practice 4 skills. - Telephone directory..

(17) - To call somebody. - What’s your telephone number? 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up : 3’ - greetings. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions : - Answer T’s questions. + Where do you live? + Does your home have a telephone? …….. => Lead in new lesson. II. Presentation: 15’ A-1: Read - Introduce: Nowadays telephone has been very - Listen. popular in our social communication. In this lesson we’ll deal with this matter. - Explain some new words: - Write down. + Telephone directory( n): Read new words. + To call ( somebody) : - Ask Ss to look at part 3 and listen to the tape. - Look at the book and listen to the tape. - Explain the model: - Listen and write. + What’s your telephone number? 8 262 019 + What’ her telephone number? - Have ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Read in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front - Practice in front of the class. of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. III. Practice : 20’ - Ask Ss to read the telephone number in the - Read the telephone numbers. telephone directory in part 1 => explain the way of reading. - Call on some Ss to read the telephone numbers - Read aloud. aloud. - Ask them to practice asking and answering - Practice asking and answering..

(18) about the telephone number in the telephone directory. - Make model: What’s TanA’s telephone number? 8 211 800 - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. A-2: Listen and write the telephone numbers. - Ask Ss to listen some people’s telephone numbers , then write the numbers they hear. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners. - Call on some Ss give the answers. - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the answers. - Correct and give the correct answers: a. 8 251 654 d. 8 352 793 b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041 c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 652 IV. Consolidation : 5’ A-3 : Listen - Ask Ss to have a survey. Name Address Telephone number. - Listen.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Listen and write. - Exchange the results with the partners. - Give the answers. - Listen to the tape and check. - Write down.. - Take a survey.. - Have Ss work in pairs asking about the - Work in pairs. information given, using these questions: + What’s your name? + Where do you live? + What’s your telephone number? - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in pairs in front of the class. class. - Correct the mistake. V. Homework: 2’.

(19) -Write the questions and answers about - Write homework. telephone numbers of the people in part 1 ( 6 ) - Prepare part A4,5 . *Rót kinh nghiÖm:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 3/9/2015 Teaching date: 9/9/2015 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 8 : Lesson 2: A - Telephone numbers ( A4,5) I.Objectives 1. Language contents: - After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about sure events in the future by using“ Will” positive statements and “ Wh” questions. - To meet ( v ) - Free ( adj ) - To see a movie - Don’t be late. - Would you like to? - Let’s meet at……. - Where will we meet? * Future tense: S + will + V . S + will not + V Will + S + V? 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures, sub-board. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game; Jumbled words - Play a game ESE; TRAST ; VOMEI ; REHATTE ROMTOROW : TALE - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write. - Go to the board and write. - Remark and give marks. II. Presentation: 15’ B-4: Listen and read. Then answer the questions. - Have Ss look at the picture and ask them to guess the talk. - Look at the picture and guess..

(20) - Introduce some new words and structures: + Would you like to + V ? Would you like to see a movie? + Where will we meet? + Let’s meet at 6:45 + Don’t be late. * Future tense: (+) S + Will + V . (-) S + will not + V . (?) Will + S + V ? EX: She will go to Hanoi tomorrow. I will not play soccer this afternoon. Will you buy a new book ? - Ask Ss to make sentences based on the models. III. Practice : 17’ - Play the tape for Ss. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to roleplay the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers: a. Phong and Tam will. b. They will see a movie. c. They will meet at 6:45 d. They will meet in front of the movie theater. - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice. + Where / meet / on the street. + What time/ meet / 7:00 + What / see / a movie. + How / go / bike. EX: Where will we meet? We’ll meet on the street. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake.. - Listen and write.. - Make sentences.. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer in front of the class. - Write down.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class..

(21) IV. Consolidation : 6’ B-5: Listen, then write the answers. - Introduce the aim of the lesson for Ss . - Listen carefully. - Ask them to listen to the tape carefully and find - Listen and complete the table. out the information to complete the table. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Listen to the tape. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Exchange the result with the - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of partner. the class. - Give the answers. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the answers. - Listen again to check the - Correct and give the correct answers: answer. a. 8 545 545 b. a movie - Listen and write. c. Lan’s house d. Bus - Ask Ss to base on the information in the box to write a short passage. - Call on one student to go to the board and write, - Write a passage. some Ss read the passage aloud. - Correct. - Go to the board and write. V. Homework: 2’ - Read aloud. - Learn by heart new structures by making 5 sentences with each. - Do exercise 1,2 at page 8 in workbook. - Write homework. - Prepare A6,7. *Rót kinh nghiÖm:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 9/9/2015 Teaching date: 14/9/2015 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 9 : Lesson 3 : A-Telephone numbers (A6,7,Remember) I.Objectives 1. Language content: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice and use the simple future tense with Will , Wh- questions and answer fluently. - Vocabulary : - Who’s calling? - To be out - Can I speak to….? To be back. - I’ll call again..

(22) - Grammar: The simple future tense. 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures, sub-board. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities I. Warm up : 3’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions and ask them to make a - Answer T’s questions. dialogue. - Call on 2 pairs to make dialogues aloud. - Practice in front of the class. - Remark and give mark. II. Presentation: 15’ B-6: Read. Then answer - Explain some structures when talking on the - Listen and write. phone. + Who’s calling? + Can/ Could I speak to ……..? Read in chorus and individually. + I’ll call again. + To be out + To be back. EX: Can I speak to Lan? She is out . - Ask Ss to make sentences. - Make sentences. - Correct the mistakes. III. Practice : 20’ - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and read in - Work in pairs. pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front - Practice reading in front of the of the class. class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Have Ss read the dialogue again then find out - Read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions. the answers. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front - Practice in front of the class. of the class. - Correct the mistake and give the correct - Copy down. answers:.

(23) a. Phong is. b. Han is. c. About Lan. d. At about 6 o’clock. e. After 6. - Use the tittle of A7 to set a scene and ask Ss to find the questions for the answers. a. At five thirty. b. We’ll eat cakes and sweets. c. Till seven or half past. d. We’ll meet in the street. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape then read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. IV. Consolidation : 5’ - Give a mapped dialogue. Tan Nam What…….do tomorrow morning? go……..stadium What……watch? A football match/ would …like…with me? Yes, when…..start? 4:30 / ……meet at 4:15 Where ……meet? in front of …stadium. ok. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake. - Ask Ss to read the remember carefully. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. V. Homework: 2’ - Learn by heart new structures by making 3 sentences with each and learn by heart remember. - Do exercise 3,4,5 at page 9 in workbook. - Prepare part B1,2,3. Preparing date: 10/9/2015 Teaching date: 15/9/2015 Week 4. - Listen carefully and find the questions.. - Listen to the tape and read after the tape. - Read aloud.. - Look at the mapped dialogue.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Read the remember.. - Write homework..

(24) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 10 : Lesson 4 : B - My birthday ( B1,2,3) I.Objectives 1. Language content: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write and speak about ordinal numbers, months and the dates of the months fluently. - Vocabulary: - Dates of the months. - Ordinal numbers. - Grammar: Review: The simple future tense. 2. Skills: 4 skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, calendar. IV. Procedure: Teachers’ Activities Students’Activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game called pelmanism - Play a game in groups. 1st 2nd 10th 5th 3rd 9th First second tenth fifth third ninth - Remark and lead in new lesson. - Listen. II. Presentation : 15’ B-1: Listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Look at the books and listen. - Explain some ordinal numbers. - Listen and write . + Ordinal numbers + th + Special cases: First : 1st Ninth : 9th Second : 2nd Twelfth : 12th Third : 3rd Twentieth : 20th Fifth : 5th Thirtieth : 30th - Play the tape for Ss and ask them to read after the - Read after the tape. tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Read aloud. - Ask Ss to speak about festival Days of Vietnam. - Practice speaking: 2/9 ; 30/4 ; 20/11 ; 8/3 The second of september The thirtieth of april The twentieth of november - Remark. The eighth of march.

(25) III. Practice : 17’ B-2: Listen and write the dates. - Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the - Answer T’s question. question: A calendar of july. What is it? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and write the - Listen to the tape and write. numbers. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of - Give the answers. the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check. - Listen to the tape again and - Correct and give the correct answers: check. The first of july. The fourteenth The nineteenth The seventeenth The sixth The thirty- first - Ask Ss to write down. - Write down. IV. Consolidation : 6’ B-3: Write the months in order from first to twelfth. - Answer T’s question. - Ask Ss some questions such as: How many months are there in a year? - Have Ss do exercise : Matching - Do exercise. January th¸ng 10 February Th¸ng 7 March Th¸ng 5 April Th¸ng 12 May Th¸ng 1 June Th¸ng 4 July Th¸ng 9 August Th¸ng 2 September Th¸ng 6 October Th¸ng 11 November Th¸ng 3 December Th¸ng 8 - Ask Ss to do exercise individually. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Exchange the result with the - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of partner. the class. - Give the answer. - Correct and ask Ss to read aloud . - Read aloud..

(26) - Have Ss write down. - Copy down. V. Homework: 2’ - learn by heart ordinal numbers. - Write homework. - Do exercises 1,2 at page 10 in workbook. - Prepare B4,5. *Rót kinh nghiÖm:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date:11/9/2015 Teaching date: 16/9/2015 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 11 : Lesson 5: B – My birthday ( B4,5) I.Objectives 1. Language content: - After the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer about the date of birth fluently and they continue to practice the simple future tense. Vocabulary: - Nervous - To worry - Worried Grammar : The simple future tense. 2. Skills: 4 skills (mainly reading) II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, sub- board. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities I English test (15 minutes ) Complete the dialoge between you and Mr Ba Do the test in to the paper Mr.Ba: What’s your family name ? You:(1)...................................... Mr.Ba :What is your address? You:(2)...................................... Mr Ba:Which school do you go to? You:(3)....................................... Mr Ba :How far is it from your house to school? You:(4)...................................... Mr Ba :What’s your telephone number? You:(5)...................................... II. Presentation : 10’.

(27) B-4: Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the picture about Mr Tan and Hoa . Then Ask Ss to guess what Mr Tan is asking Hoa. - Call on some Ss to answer. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and give the information.. - Explain some new words: + Nervous ( adj) : + To worry(v) : + Worried ( adj ) : - Have Ss read in chorus and individually. - Check new words by playing What and where. - Play the tape for Ss to listen again. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Call on one student to go to the board and write the answers. - Correct and ask Ss to copy down. * About you: - Ask a student some questions in part about you. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. III. Practice : 15’ B-5: Read the dialogue again . then complete this form. -Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and complete the form. - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner.. - Look at the picture and guess.. - Answer. - Give the information: + Name. + Date of birth. + Address + Telephone number. - Listen and copy .. Read in chorus and individually. - Play a game. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write the answers on the board. - Copy down. - Answer T’s questions. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Read the dialogue again. - Complete the form. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering - Exchange the result with the about the information in the form. partner..

(28) - Call on 2 Ss to ask and answer in front of the - Work in pairs. class. - Correct and ask Ss to complete the form in the - Practice in front of the class. notebooks. IV. Consolidation : 3’ - Copy down. - Ask Ss to base on the information in the dialogue to make a dialogue. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Make a dialogue. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Correct if necessary. Practice in front of the class. V. Homework: 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 11 in workbook. - Write homework. - Prepare part B6,7,8,9. *Rót kinh nghiÖm:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date:15/9/2015 Teaching date: 21/9/2015 UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period 12 : Lesson 6 : B-My birthday ( B6,7, 8, 9,Remember) I.Objectives 1. Language content: - By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday party. They will use the dates of the month fluently. -Vocabulary: - Birthday party. – To join - To invite - Fun - To finish - Invitation card - Grammar: Review : The simple future tense 2. Skills: speaking and writing skills. II :Methods Eliciting. mainly communicative, using pictures. Students work in pairs / in groups III. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, cards. IV. Procedure: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities.

(29) I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Networks. Things to buy on birthday. - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups. cakes. - Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write . - Remark and lead in new lesson. II. Presentation : 15’ B-6: Read. Then complete the card. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions: + What is Lan doing? + What are they doing in the picture? - Explain some new words: + Birthday party (n) : + To invite (v) : + Invitation card (n) : + To finish (v) = to end + To join (v) = to take part in + fun (n) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember. - Ask Ss to read the text about Lan and find out the answers to the questions. + How old is she now? + Where does she live? + When is her birthday? + When will the party start and finish? - Call on some Ss to answer the questions. - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. III. Practice : 16’ - Ask Ss to look at the invitation card of Lan and then complete it, using the information from the text.. Discuss in groups.. - Go to the board and write.. - Look at the pictures and answer .. - Listen and write . - Guess the meanings .. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Play a game. - Read the text and find the answers for the questions.. - Answer the questions. - Read the text aloud. - Complete the invitation card..

(30) - Have Ss compare the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed card aloud. - Correct the mistake and ask Ss to write in the notebooks. B-7: Think and write. Imagine you will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party. - Have Ss imagine they will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party. What will they do? - Have Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 discussing what they will bring to Lan’s birthday party. - Go around the class and hepl Ss if necessary. - Call on some representatives to demonstrate in front of the class. - Remark. IV.Consolidation : 7’ B-8: Now write an invitation card to your birthday party. - Have Ss write an invitation to their birthday party based on part 6. - Ask Ss to exchange their writing with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read their invitation in front of the class. - Remark. B-9: Play with words. - Have Ss look at the book and listen to the tape. -Ask Ss to read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the remember and repeat again. V. Homework: 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. learn by heart part remember. - Do exercise 4,5 at page 12 in workbook. - Prepare part A 1,2 ( unit 3). - Compare with the partner. - Read aloud.. - Imagine . - Work in groups.. - Demonstrate in front of the class.. - Write an invitation. - Exchange the writing with the partner. - Read aloud.. - Listen to the tape. - read after the tape. - Read aloud. - Repeat. - Write homework.. *Rót kinh nghiÖm:……………………………………………………………. UNIT 3 : AT HOME (5 Lessons).

(31) -Describe room and homes Aim -Make a complaint -Give a compliment -Talk about occupations -Present & Future simple tense Language focus -Prepositions -Adjectives Lesson 1 : A1 Lesson 2 : A2+3+4+Remember Unit Allocation Lesson 3 : B1+2 Lesson 4 : B3+4 Lesson 5 : B5+6+Remember Preparing date: 16/9/2015 Teaching date: 22/9/2015 Week 5 Unit 3 : at home Period 13 :Lesson 1 : A – What a lovely home ( A1) I.Objectives 1. Language content: After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the exclamations by giving compliments and complaints , they will learn about the things in the bathroom and the kitchen. - Vocabulary: - Awful - Washing machine - Sink - Dryer - Comfortable - Refrigerator - Tub - Dishwasher - Amazing - Electric stove - Convenient - Grammar: Structure: What + a/ an + adj + N! What + adj + Ns ! 2. Skills: 4 skills. II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. III. Anticipated problems: There are too many new words. The dialoge is long so it is very difficult for students to remember and practice reading. T asks students to work at home before and after the lesson. IV. Procedure:.

(32) 1.Class organization: 2.Oral test:Read B6 then answer the teacher’s questions 3.New lesson: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Networks - Play a game. Kitchen. Living room. - Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write down. - Remark and give marks. II. New lesson: a) Listen. Then practice with a partner: 15’ - Ask Ss some questions such as : + how many rooms are there in your house? + What are they? + What is in each room? - Introduce the situation of the lesson, then explain some new words: + Awful ( adj ) : + Comfortable (adj) : + Amazing (adj) : + Sink (n) : + Tub (n) : + Washing machine (n ) : +Dryer(n) + Refrigerator (n) : + Dish washer (n) : + Electric stove (n) : + Convenient (adj): - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Check new words by playing : rub out and remember. - Introduce the exclamations to Ss. EX: What a hot day ! ( Today is very hot ) What a boring film! ( The film is very boring.) What nice colors! (The colors are nice) Form: What +(a/an)+adj+noun!. - Go to the board and write.. - Answer T’s questions.. - Listen and write.. - Guess meanings.. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Play a game.. Listen , coppy and remember..

(33) b/ Practice : 20’ - Ask Ss to work in groups : look at the books and - Work in groups, listen to the listen to the tape , then find out the things in the tape and find the things. bathroom and the kitchen. - Call on some representatives to tell the things in the - Give the results. bathroom and the kitchen. - Remark. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of - Practice reading in front of the class. the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the - Work in pairs. questions. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the Practice asking and class. answering. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers: a) Living room, Hoa’s room, bathroom and kitchen. - Copy down. b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors. c) A sink, a tub and a shower. d) A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a dish washer, and an electric stove. - Have Ss copy down. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about - Work in pairs. themselves, using 2 questions in the book. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Practice in front of the class. III. Consolidation: 3’ - Ask Ss to use the structures of exclamations to make sentences. Ss work independence and 1. the boy/ lazy write 2. the story / interesting 3. the books/ thick - Write homework. 4. the food / nice - Remark. IV. Homework : 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercies 1,2 at page 13 in workbook. - Prepare part A3. *Comments :…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 17/9/2015 Teaching date: 23/9/2015.

(34) UNIT 3 : AT HOME Period 14 :Lesson 2 : A- What a lovely home ! ( 2,4,Remember) I.Objectives 1. Language content: After the lesson, Ss will review vocabularies about the things in the house and write exclamations Review : - vocabularies about the things in the house. - exclamations - Prepositions. - There is …../ there are ….. 2. Skills: speaking and writing skills. II. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, computer and OHP. III. Anticipated problems: The Ss may make mistake when using “a, an or 0” before N” Ex What a beatiful day! / What nice weather! / What an awful weather! / what lazy students! T explains carefully. IV. Procedure: 1. Class organization: 2.Oral test:Read A1 then answer the questions P30. 3.New lesson: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game:Noughts and crosses Dinner Movie Restaurant. - Greetings. - Play the game in 2 groups. - Making sentences.. Boy. Shirt. Room. Girl. House. Party. - Ask Ss make exclamations. - Remark. II. New lesson: a) Write exclamations: 20’ - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find the exclamations. - Write lesson. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Read the dialogue and find.

(35) - Introduce the exclamations to Ss. EX: What a hot day ! ( Today is very hot ) What a boring film! ( The film is very boring.) - Give some situations , then ask Ss to make exclamations. + This boy is very lazy. + The story is very interesting. + The house is dark. - Have Ss give the structures. - Ask Ss to practice making exclamations using given cues in the book. -Ask Ss to hang their answers. - Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud . - Correct and ask them to write down. b) Look at the picture . then practice with a partner : 7’ * Point and say: - Ask Ss to look at the picture carefullyand tell the things in the picture, using there is/ there are…. - Make examples: + There is a table. + There are some chairs. + There are some pictures. - Ask Ss to work in group and list - Call on some Ss to say the things in the picture aloud. - Correct the mistakes. - Have Ss write in the notebook. * Ask and answer. - Have Ss practice in pairs asking and answering the things in the picture and using the words in the box. - Ex: Is there a bookshelf? Yes, there is. Where is it? It is on the wall. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake if necessary. - Ask Ss to write down. c) Play with words : 8’. the exclamations. - Read aloud. - Listen and write.. Groupwork. - Make sentences. - Write exclamations.. - Read aloud. - Write down.. - Look at the picture and tell the things. - Listen.. - work in group and list - Say the things in the picture.. - Write down. - Work in pairs. - Listen.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write down..

(36) - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Look at the book and listen to - Explain some new words: the tape. + Smell ( n ) - Listen and write. + To forget >< To remember + Safe ( adj) - Have Ss read after the tape. - Read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Read aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. III. Consolidation: 3’ - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read. - Read. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Read aloud. - Ask Ss to make sentences with them. - Make sentences. IV. Homework:2’ - Make sentences with remember. - Write homework. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 14,15 in workbook. - Prepare B1,2. *Comments:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Week 6 Preparing date: 23/9/2015 Teaching date: 28/9/2015 UNIT 3 : AT HOME Period 15 :Lesson 3 : B- Hoa’s family ( B1,2 ) I.Objectives 1. Language content: By the end of the lesson, Ss will learn about jobs and job vocabulary. They will apply the in the life. - Vocabulary: - Countrysise - Cattle - To grow - To raise - Till - Housework - To take care of - Journalist - To write for - Sick - Grammar: Review : The simple present tense. 2. Skills: reading and writing skills. II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. III. Anticipated problems: Some Ss may find it difficult to write about their family. T explains carefully and asks the others to help them..

(37) IV. Procedure: 1. Class organization: 2.Oral test:Describe 5 things in the class,using there is /are. 3.New lesson: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare - Play a game in 2 groups. - Ask Ss to find out the words about the jobs. - Find out the jobs. H T E N S A U D O R A H S M I E N G F A R S T U. A L C M C I M D. C H E P W T T O R E R O H K D N E E E R I E N T. R S C A M R N Q. - Remark and lead in new lesson. II. New lesson: a) Listen. Then pratice with a partner: 15’ - Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book. - Introduce the situation of the dialogue then ask Ss to guess what Hoa’s parents do. - Explain some new words. + Countryside(n) : + To grow (v) : + To raise (v) : + Cattle (n) : + Till (adv) : + Housework (n) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Correct their pronunciation. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class. * Now answer: - Have Ss work in pairs. - Have them play a game : Lucky numbers. 1) What does Hoa’s father do?. - Listen.. - Look at the picture . - Listen and guess. - Listen and write. - Guess the meanings.. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Play a game..

(38) 2) Where does he work? 3) LN 4) What is her mother’s job? 5) What does her mother do everyday? 6) LN 7) Are they happy? 8) How old is Hoa’s sister? - Remark. - Ask Ss to write down the answers in the notebooks. b) Read : 18’ - Ask Ss to look at 3 pictures in the book and guess what they do. - Call on some Ss to tell about their jobs. - Correct and give the correct answer, then introduce some new words: + To take care of = To look after + To write for (v) + Journalist (n): + Sick (adj) = ill - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Ask them to play a game : Rub out and remember. - Have Ss read the text about Lan’s family in silent. - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Correct the pronunciation. * Now practice with a partner. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about Lan’s family. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers: + Her father is a doctor. He works in a hospital. + Her mother is a teacher. She teaches in a primary school. + Her brother is a journalist. He writes for a HN newspaper. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about their family. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Remark. III. Consolidation: 5’. - Write the answers.. - Look at 3 pictures in the book. - Tell about the jobs. - Listen and write.. - Read new words . - Play a game. - Read in silent. - Read aloud.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Listen and write.. - Work in pairs. - Practice..

(39) - Have Ss write a short passage about their family. - Ask them to exchange the writing with the - Write a short passage. partner. - Exchange the writing. - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of - Read aloud. the class. IV. Home work: 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for - Write homework. each. – Prepare part B3,4 - Do exercise unit 3 in Bai tap thuc hanh *Rót kinh nghiÖm:…………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 24/9/2015 Teaching date: 29/9/2015 UNIT 3 : AT HOME Period 16: B – Hoa’s Family ( B3,4 ) I. Objectives: 1. Language content: By the end of the lesson, students should be able to know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order to know the information then complete the forms. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about the jobs. Grammar: Review : the present simple tense. 2. Skills: Listening. II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. III. Anticipated problems: Some Ss may find it difficult to write about their family. T explains carefully and asks the others to help them. IV. Procedure: 1. Class organization: 2.Oral test:Read B1,2 then answer the questions P34. 3.New lesson: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up: (5’) - Greetings. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions about their families, such - Answer T’s questions. as: What does your father do? Where does he work? What does your mother do?.

(40) Do you have any brothers / sisters? How old is he/ she? …… - Remark and give mark.Lead in the new lesson II. New lesson: (35’) a) Match these half- sentences. - Explain the aim of the exercise and ask ss to do. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner.. - Write new lesson.. - Listen and do exercise.. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed sentences - Read completed sentences. in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers: - Listen and copy. + A farmer works on a farm. + A doctor takes care of sick people. + A journalist writes for a newspaper. + A teacher teaches in a school. - Ask Ss to copy down. b) Listen, complete these forms for the three people on the tape. - Look at the forms. - Ask Ss to look at the form in the books. - Guess the information. - Have Ss guess the information of three people. Open prediction Name Age Job Place of work Tom Susan Bill - Call on some groups to give their predictions. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times to check their prediction. - Ask Ss to fill in the forms. - Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check. - Correct and give the correct answers: - Ask Ss to use the information about 3 people then ask and answer. - Make example: + What is his name? => His name’s Tom. + How old is he? => He is 26. + What does he do?=> He’s a teacher.. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check. - Fill in the forms.. - Listen again and check. - Copy down. - Work in pairs. - Listen..

(41) + Where does he work?=> He works at a high school. - Practice in front of the class. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Name Correct the mistakes. Age Job Place of work Tom Susan Bill. 26 19 20. Teacher At a high school Journalist For a magazine Nurse in a hospital. III. Consolidation: (3’) - Have Ss write about 3 people in the forms. - Write about 3 people. - Ask Ss to exchange the writings with the partners. - Exchange the writing. - call on some Ss to read in front of the class. - Read aloud. 4. Homework: - Do exercise 3,4 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Write homework. - Prepare part B5,6 *Comments:…………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 25/9/2015 Teaching date: 30/9/2015 UNIT 3 : AT HOME Period 17 : Lesson 5 : B- Hoa’s family (B5,6,Remember) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students should be able to use comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives .They can use them fluently and apply in the life. 1.Language content: 1. Vocabulary: - Apartment - Furnished - Advice - Suitable - Empty - Good=> better => the best 2. Grammar: Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 - S + tobe + the most + adj. 2. Skills: Listening. II. Teaching aids: Textbook, tape, cassette, pictures. III. Anticipated problems: Some Ss may find it difficult to remember the new structures..

(42) T explains carefully and asks the others to help them. IV. Procedure: 1. Class organization: 2.Oral test:.Correct B4 P17 in work book. 3.New lesson: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities 1. Warm up: (5’) - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Guess the jobs. - Play a game: + You go to this person when you have a + Dentist. toothache. + This person writes for a newspaper or magazine. + Journalist + Before a house is built , this person draws the + Architect plan for it. + This person grows vegetables and raises cattle. + Farmer …. - Remark and give marks. II. New lesson : (35’) - Write new lesson. a) Listen and read: - Introduce the content of the lesson to Ss . - Listen. - Explain some new words: - Listen and write. + Apartment (n)= Flat . + Advice (n) : - Guess the meanings . + Empty (adj) >< Full + Furnished ( adj) : - Read in chorus + Suitable (adj) : and individually. + Good => better=> the best Structures: + Comparatives of long adjectives S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 - Make sentences. EX: She is more beautiful than her sister. + Superlatives of long adjectives: S + tobe + the most + adj . EX: He is the most intelligent. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Listen to the tape. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front - Practice reading . of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the - Find the answers . answers for the questions. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Work in pairs..

(43) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice asking class. and answering. - Correct and give the answer key: - Listen and copy. a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79 c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27. The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the newest of the three apartments. It has two bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen. b) Write. - Introduce the situation of the lesson. - Listen. - Ask Ss to read the letter . - Read the letter. - Have Ss use the given words in the box in order - Complete the letter. to complete the letter. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Exchange the result with the - Call on some Ss to read the completed letter partner. aloud. - Read the letter aloud. - Correct and give the correct answer. - Ask Ss to copy the letter in the notebooks. -Copy the letter in III. Consolidation: (3’) the notebooks. - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read . - Read . - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Have Ss make sentences with them. - Make sentences. IV. Homework: (2’) - Learn by heart new words and structures - Write homework. by making sentences with them. - Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Prepare language focus 1. *Comments:…………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… WEEK 7 Preparing date: 01/9/2015 Teaching date: 05/10/2015 Period 18:Language focus 1 A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students should be able to review the structures and grammar which they have been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and do some exercises easily. B. Language content: - Present simple tense..

(44) - Future simple tense. - Ordinal numbers. - Comparatives and superlatives. - Prepositions of place. - Occupations. C. Methods : Eliciting, using pictures, pairwork, groupwork. D. Teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, sub-board. E. Procedure: Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: (5’) - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions about their health, families. II. Consolidation and practice: (35’) (1) Present simple tense: - Ask Ss to repeat the use of the present simple tense. - Ask them to do exercise 1: Complete the passage using the verbs in brackets. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Correct and give the correct answers. (2) Future simple tense: - Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses Go post office Tidy yard Meet Minh. Call Ba. Read book. See movie. Watch TV. Write Grandmother. Students’ activities - Greetings. - Answer T’s questions.. - Repeat aloud. - Do exercise. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Read aloud.. - Play a game.. Make sentences.. Do housework. EX: He will go to the post office. He won’t call Ba. - Remark. (3) Ordinal numbers; - Ask Ss to write the correct ordinal numbers. - Call on 2 Ss to go to the board and write. - Correct if necessary.. - Write ordinal numbers. - Go to the board and write..

(45) (4) Prepositions: - Have Ss look at the pictures in the book and use the prepositions in the box to write the positions of the cat. - Call on some Ss to speak aloud. - Correct and give the correct answers; a. It’s in front of the chair. c. It’s behind the TV. d. It’s next to the bookshelf. e. It’s on the couch. (5) Adjectives: - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and use the adjectives in the box to make sentences about comparatives and superlatives. - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down. - Correct and give the correct answers: a) A is a cheap toy. B is cheaper. C is the cheapest. b) A is an expensive dress. B is more expensive. C is the most expensive. ……. (6) Occupations: - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers. 1. LN 2. He fights fires. He is very brave. What is his job? 3. She works in a school. She teaches students. what is her job? 4. He lives in the countryside. He grows vegetables and raises cattle. What’s his job? 5. LN. 6. She works in a hospital. She makes people well. What’s her job? 7. He works in a factory. He repairs machines . What’s his job? 8. LN (7) Is there a….?/ Are there any…? - Have Ss look at the picture then complete the sentences. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the. - Look at the pictures carefully and write. - Speak aloud. - Copy.. - Make sentences.. - Go to the board and write. - Copy down.. - Play a game in 2 groups.. - Complete the sentences. - Work in pairs..

(46) class. - Correct if necessary. - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks. (8) Question words: - Ask Ss to look at the form then ask and answer the information about Pham Trung Hung. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct and ask them to write down. III. Consoidation: ( 3’) - Give some cues then ask Ss to make sentences. + Sydney / big / Australia. + Tokyo / expensive / World. + He / good student / class. IV. Homework: (2’) - Do test yourself in workbook. - Review for the test.. - Practice in front of the class.. - Copy down. - Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering. - Write. - Do exercise.. - Write homework.. *Comments:…………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 1/10/2015 Teaching date: 6/10/2016 Period 19: English written test A. Objectives: The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will know each student and class’s knowledge and have the method to teach. B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : prepare a written test - Students: Review C.The content of the test. . Ma trËn : Chủ đề NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Tæng KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL I. Listening 4 4 2.0 II. Reading. 2.0 5. 5 2.5. III. Language focus IV.Writing. 6. 2.5 10. 4 1.5. 2.0. 3.5 4. 4.

(47) 2.0 Tæng. 6. 4. 4. 5. 4. 2.0 23. 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.0 10 Question I: Choose the best answers to complete the sentences .(1,5ps) 1. We will ……………our old friend next Sunday. A. to meet B. meeting C. meet 2. Her birthday is ……………Friday, August 20th A. at B. in C. on 3. This dress is the …………..expensive of the four dresses A. best B. more C. most 4. My father take care …………….sick children. A. of B. about C. in 5. Would you like …………the movie with me? A. see B. to see C. seeing 6. Which is the most beautiful apartment? A. The smallest one B. the smaller one C. a small one Question II: Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. ( 2ps) 1. Mr Hung ( be ) ………….a doctor. He ( work ) …………….in a hospital. Everyday he ( catch)…………….the bus to work. 2. We ( not play )…………………soccer tomorrow, we ( visit ) ………………. our old friends. 3. What…………..your father ( do ) ……………………now? He ( watch ) …………………TV in the living room. 4. She’d like ( come ) ……………..with us. Question III: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given. (2ps) 1. There is a sink, a tub and a shower in the bathroom. => The bathroom ……………………………………………………. 2. The picture is very expensive. => What ……………………………………………………………. 3. No houses on the street are older than my house. => My house ………………………………………………………. 4. She rides a bike to school everyday. => She goes ……………………………………………………….. Question IV: Read the passage then answer the questions. ( 2,5ps) I am Hoa . I live with my parents in a small town in Hanoi. My parents are workers, and they work in a factory. Everyday, they go to work to the factory early in the morning and come back late in the afternoon. They go to work by bus. My school is not far from my house so I often go to school on foot. I often do the housework to help my parents. The next Sunday will be my thirteenth birthday. I’ll invite some of my classmates to join in my birthday party at my house. 1. Where does Hoa live ? ……………………………………………………… 2. How do Hoa’s parents go to work? ………………………………………….

(48) 3. Why does Hoa go to school on foot? ………………………………………. 4. How old will she be next Sunday? ………………………………………… 5. What will she invite some of her classmates to do ? ……………………………………………………………………………… Question V: Listen carefully , then complete this form.(2ps) Name :……………………………………… Date of birth :……………………………… Address : …………………………………. Telephone number :………………………. V. Homework: - Do unit 3 in Bai tap thuc hanh *Comments:…………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… Preparing date: 3/10/2015 Teaching date: 7/10/2015 Period 20: Correcting the test A. Objectives: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English. B. Teaching aids : Test papers, chalk, board. C. Procedure: I / Remark the good and bad of the test and correct some common mistakes . 1. Teacher's remark: a. Advantages: - Some ss prepare for the test quite well:………… - Some ss understand the knowledge in the test and know how to do the test. - Some ss get good marks:……….. b. Disadvantages: - Ss don't remember the grammar, model sentences, new words ... - The ss's attitude in learning is not good:………. 2. Return the ss' paper sheets. - Ask ss to look at their test carefully and check their mistakes. - Explain the ss 's complain if they have. ( marks, ...) 3. Mark Class 0-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 7A 7B II Correcting the test Question I: Each correct sentence gives 0,25. 1. b 2. c 3. c 4. a 5. b 6. a.

(49) Question II: Each correct verb gives 0,25 1. is ; works ; catches. 2. won’t play; will visit. 3. is your father doing ; is watching. 4. to come. Question III: Each correct sentence gives 0,5. 1. The bathroom has a sink, a tub and a shower. 2. What an expensive picture! 3. My house is the oldest on the street. 4. She goes to school by bikeeveryday. Question IV: Each correct answer has 0,5 1. She lives in a small town near Hanoi. 2. They go to work by bus. 3. Because her school is not far from her house. 4. She will be 13. 5. She will invite them to join in her birthday party. Question V: Each correct information has 0,5. Name : Nguyen Thanh Trung Date of birth : May 25th Address : Thirty- five Nguyen Trai street Telephone number : 8 253 764. * Tapecription : Hi, my full name is Nguyen Thanh Trung, I live with my parents at thirty- five Nguyen Trai street. I’ll be thirteen on May 25th . I’ll invite some friends to my birthday party at my house. My telephone number is 8 253 764 III. Homework: Prepare unit 4 – A1,2,3 *Comments:…………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………. UNIT 4:. at school.. I. Aims 1. Knowledge. -. After finishing the lesson Ss will be able to: + Ask and say the time/ timetables + Talk about school subject/ schedules and regulations..

(50) + Ask for and give directions + Have more love to all subjects of the school, know how to learn in library - Language +Vocabulary: schedule, physics, physical education school uniform, break, school cafeteria, snacks, popular, after school – activities, rack, shelf, science book, dictionary, reader, novel, reference book, at the back of, congress, capital, receive, contain, employeerocket, space, adventure + Grammar, pronunciation Present simpe tense Present progressive tense. Preposition of position. Demonstratives: this/ that/ these/ those 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading, writing II.Teaching methods - Community, group work, pair work, some adroitness III.Teaching aids - Cassettes, tape, book, chalk, board, paper sheet, picture of library…. IV. Anticipated problems: Compound adjectives. V.Procedures From period 21st to 25th ............................................................................ Week 8 Ngày soạn: 8/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 12/10/2012 Period 21 Unit 4: At school Lesson 1 : A - Schedules (1, 2 , 3 ) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for state the time and talk about their timetable. II. Teaching aids - Cassettes, tape, book, chalk, board, … III. Procedures: T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities. I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Have ss play a game : Slap the board Math Physics. Physical education. Geography Music. English History. - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups..

(51) - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game. II. New lesson: 35’ 1. Listen and repeat - Ask Ss to repeat the questions about asking the time. - Have Ss look at the clocks in the book. - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape. - Have Ss read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ( exchange the roles) - remark. 2.Answer about you. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about them. - Make model with a student: T: What time do you get up? S : I get up at 6 o’clock. T: What time do classes start? S : They start at 7 o’ clock. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Remark and ask them to write the answers in the notebooks. 3) Listen and write. Complete the schedule. - Ask Ss to look at the schedule then explain the aim of the exercise. - Have Ss guess the missing subjects and time. - Call on some Ss to give their prediction. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and compare their prediction. - Play the tape again and ask Ss to write the missing subjects and time. - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners. - Play the tape again for Ss to check the results. - Ask Ss to give the answers. - Correct and give the correct answer. - Ask Ss to copy down. Friday 7:00 7:50 8:40 9:40 10:30 English Georaphy Music Physics History. - Write new lesson. - Give the questions. - Look at the clocks in the book. - Listen to the tape. - Read after the tape. - Read aloud. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Work in pairs.. - Listen . - Practice in front of the class. - Write down. - Listen. - Guess. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check. - Listen to the tape and write. - Exchange the results. - Listen again and check. - Give the answer. - Listen and write..

(52) Saturday 1:00 2:40 3:40 4:30 Physical education Math English Physics - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time of the subjects on Friday and Saturday . - Work in pairs. EX: What time do they have English on Friday ? They have English at 7:00 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. - Practice in front of the IV.Consolidation: 3’ class. - Repeat the way of speaking the times and subjects at school. - Speak aloud. IV. Homework: 2’ - Do the exercise 1, 2 in the workbook - Write homework. - Prepare part 4,5. * Comments: ...................................................................................... ...................................................................................... ........................ .............................................................................................................. Ngày soạn: 9/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 13/10/2015. Unit 4: At school Period 22: Lesson 2 : A. Schedules (A4, A5) I. Objestives: - By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to +Ask and answer about actions which are happening at the speaking time What + be + S + doing? S + be + V-ing+ ... + Ask and answer about actions which happens everyday What time + do/does + S + V-inf ......? S + V-inf + ...... II. The teaching aids: - Texbook, teacher's book, cassette and tape, pictures III. Procedures Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm up:5’ * Network - Go to the board and write "Subjects" subjects 2. New lesson : 35’ * Activity 1: - Ask and answer about the time - Look at the pictures and tell - Ask ss to look at the pictures in part A4 and tell names of activities names of activities - Ask ss to look at the examples Ex1: What is Lan studying? She is studying Physics Ex2:.

(53) What time does Lan have her Physics class? She has her Physics class at 8.40 - Review ss the present progressive tense - Question with "what" What + be + S + doing? S + be + V-ing + ........ - Review ss the present simple tense What time + do/does + S + V-inf ? S + V-inf+ ..........+ at ......... - Ask ss to practice in pairs: Remark and correct mistakes if have * Activity 2: Drill speaking skill Do you know/have your daily and weekly schedule? Do you usually follow the schedule? - Ask ss to look at A5 - Open the tape once - Explain structures 1. Ask and answer about time When/ What time + do/does + S + V-inf? 2. Ask and answer about your own favorite subjects What + is + one's favorite subject? 3. Structures: "too" - "Too"stands at the end of the sentences. It expresses agreement - Open the tape twice or three times. Pause each sentences and explain - Ask ss to practice in pairs before class - Ask ss to write your schedule in your exercise book - After finishing writing , use structurea in the lesson to ask and answer about your schedule 3. Consolidation : 3’ - Review the present progressive tense and the present simple tense 4. Homework :2’ - Ask ss to make up similar dialogue - Ask ss to do your homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. Ex: What is Lan doing? She is studying Physics Ex: What time does Lan have her Physics class? She has her Physics class at 8.40 - Practice in pairs - Answer questions - Look at A5 - Listen to the whole dialogue Ex: When do you have Math? Ex: What's your favorite subject? Ex: I like English I like it, too - Listen carefully - Ask ss to write schedule. - Listen and remember Write down. * Comments: ...................................................................................... ...................................................................................... ........................ .............................................................................................................. Ngày soạn: 12/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 19/10/2015. Unit 4: At school Period 23:Lesson 3:A. Schedules (A6,A7+ remember).

(54) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to speak about the different between t wo people, t wo objects S + be + different from + O Talk about the different between educations in the USA and in VietNam II. The teaching aids: Textbook, pictures, cassette& tape III.Procedure Teacher's activities Students' activiies 1. Warm up(5') - Call two ss to go to the board and check your timetable - Talk about timetable 2. New lesson(18’) - In America, which country has capital city as Washington DC? - USA = the United States - What do you think about USA? of America - What do you know/ want to know about USA? - Ask ss to look at the title "Schools in USA" - Look at the tittile - You will read a passage about schools in America and decide the statements are true or false - Ask ss to read and compare the results with a partner - Compare the results - Ask ss to read answers aloud before class and correct with a partner mistakes if have - Read answers aloud - Give correct answers a) T - Copy in the exercise b) F (There are no lessons on Saturday) book c) F (One break is in the morning, the other is in the afternoon) d) T e) F (The school cafeteria opens at lunch time and also at break) f) F (Basketball is one of the most popular after school activities) - Ask ss to read the dialogue again and explain newwords (10') - Listen and Copy To be different from: School uniform: Start: End: A 20- minute break: School cafeteria: Snacks: Popular: After-school activities: * Activity 2(5') - Groupwork - Talk about the different between schools in the USA and schools in Vietnam - Work in groups * Activity 3: Play with words.

(55) - Open the tape twice or three times. Ask ss to listen and repeat in chorus - Explain newwords Home Economics: The world changes: Rivers and mountain ranges: Several: 3. Consolidation(5') - Ask Ss to answer questions. a. What are you studying? b. What time do you have it? c. When do you have it? d. What is she studying? e. What time does she have it ? f. When does she have it? 4. Homework:( 2’) - Rewrite the passage and translate into Vietnamse - Ask ss to do your homework - Ask ss to prepare new lesson. - Listen and repeat in chorus -Copy. -Listen and remember. - Write down. * Comments: ...................................................................................... ...................................................................................... ........................ .............................................................................................................. Week 9 Ngày soạn: 15/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 20/10/2015. Unit 4: At school Period 24: Lesson 4: B : The library ( 1, 2) I-Objectives - After this lesson, The S can describe their library with school subjects. 1-Grammar. - Prepositions of position. - This/ That , These/ Those. 2. Vocabulary. Topic: The library at school. II- Teaching aids. - Objects of teaching ( an English book,a ruler, chalks,teaching notebook....) . - An extra board, a picture, cassette, tape. III-Procedures. Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1, Warm up: 6’ “Network” History Physics Subjects. - Play game. Geography.

(56) English Math Physical education 2.New lesson: 35’ a.Presentation: Ask s to look at the pictures and ask:  What is it in the picture?  Where do you usually see it?  Does your school have library?  What do you usually do wen you go to library?  Who usually helps you find the books in the library? Rack. (n) (picture) Science. (n) (picture) Biology. (n) (realia) Chemistry. (n) (realia) Reader. (n) (translation) Novel. (n) (translation) b. Checking: “Slap the board” - Get the S to listen to the tape twice.(B2) - Ask the S to read in pairs before class. - Get Ss to listen to the tape twice. (B1) - Call Ss to read in pairs before class. * Comprehension question. ( work in pair) a, The magazines are on the racks. ( near the science book) b, They are on the racks , near the history books. c, The Maths and the science books are on shelves on the left. d, The History and Geography, dictionaries and Literature in Vietnamese are on the shelves on the right. e, The book in English are at the back of the library. f, The library opens at 7 a.m. g, It closes at 4.30 p.m. 3- Production:3’ - Hang on a picture with the library on it - Ask the S to look at the picture to describe the library. - Ask the S to work in pair to ask and introduce about their library in their school. - Ask the Ss to compare it with the one provided in the book. - Feedback. 4- Homework: 2’. Answer the questions.. - Read and copy.. - Go to the BB to slap the board. - Listen to the tape. - Read in pairs. - Listen to the tape. - Read in pairs. - Answer questions And copy in the notebooks.. - Look at the picture and describe the library.

(57) - Ask the S to learn new words by heart . - Listen and write - Ask the S to do ex5,6 in ex.book. - Prepare the next lesson. * Comments: ...................................................................................... ...................................................................................... .................... ............................................................................................................. Ngày soạn: 16/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 21/10/2015 Unit 4: At school Period 25: Lesson 5 - B : The library (3,4,5+ Remember ) I. The objectives : By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know the information about one of the world’s largest libraries thoughe the text. They will review the prepositions of position and library vocabulary. 1. Vocabulary - To receive (v) - To contain (v) - Employee (n) - Congress (n) 2. Grammar : - The present simple tense. - Skill : Listeing, reading. II. Teaching aids Text book , tape, cassette, pictures if have III. Procedure : T’s activities Ss’ activities 1. Warm up :(5') - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play a game - Play a game Noughts and Crosses Science books Reference books Newspapers Magazines. Readers. Biology books. Novels. History books. Dictionaries. - Make example : S1 : Where are the science books ? S2 : They are on the sheklves on the right - Remark and lead in new lesson 2. New lesson: a. Listen :(10') Where are they ? - Ask Ss to look at the chart in the library - Have Ss work in groups guessing the positions of the books in the library. - Call on some representatives to speak about the pisitions of books - Play the tape for Ss and ask them ti check their. - Play game in 2 groups. ( Make questions and answers). - Look at the chart carefully - Work in groups to discuss the posotions - Demonstrate their.

(58) predictions <2times> - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class - Play the tape again and check the answer - Give the correct answer : 1. Study 2. Science + math 3: Geography 4 + 5 : Newspapers and magazines 6+7 : English 8, Librarian’s desk - Ask Ss to compare their predictions - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the positions of books - Correct the mistakes b. Read then answer: * Pre- reading:10min - Introduce the lesson then explain some new words + To reccive (v) : NhËn + Comgress (n) : Quèc héi + To contain (v) : bao gåm + Employee (n) : nh©n viªn Checking technique : Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to do exerise : T or F prediction 1. The library of Congress is in New york 2. It receives copies of all E books 3. There are over 100 million books in this library 4. The shelves are about 300 km long. 5. 5.000 people work in the library - Ask some representatives to give their predictions *While-reading:9 min - Ask Ss to look at the text, read in silent then check their predictions - Call on some Ss to give the answer 1-F 2-F 3-T 4–F 5-T - Call on some students read the text in front of the class - Correct their pronunciations - Ask Ss to look at the text again then find out the answers for the question - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers < The questions in the book > 1–d 2 - Ln. predictions - Listen to the tape - Give the results - Listen to the tape - Copy down. - Compare the predictions - Work in pairs S1 : Where are E books ? S2 : They are on the shelves behind the librarian’s desk. - Listen carefully - Listen and copy down - Guess meanings read new words in chours and individually - Work in groups to predict. - Give the predictions - Read the text in silent and check the predictions - Give the answers - Read the text aloud - Read the text and find the answers - Play a game in groups answer the questions.

(59) 3–e 4–b 5 – LN 6–a 7–c - Ask Ss to write the answers in their notebooks * Post_reading: 6min - Ask Ss to compare their school library with the library of Conguss - Ask them to write the sentences Ex : My school library in smaller than the library of Congress <5> Play with words :3min - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the teacher - Ask Ss to read after the teacher - Explain some new words : + To forget (v) : + Rocket (n) : + Space (n) : + Adveture (n) : - Call on some Ss to read the poem aloud - Correct their pronunciation 3. Consolation :2min . - Ask Ss look at the remember and use the phrases of prepositions and pronouns to make sentences. 4. Home work : 2min - Learn by herart new works by writing 3 lines for each - Do exercise 4 at page 26 in work book - Prepare Unit 5 part A1,2.. - Write the answers - Compare 2 librarys - Write down. - Listen - Read after the teacher - Listen and write down - Read aloud. - Listen carefully and make sentences. - Write home work. Unit 5: Work and play I.Aims -. After finishing the unit Ss will be able to : + Talk about the subjects of school. + Describe the activities at recess. + Know some traditional games that Ss play at recess. 1. knowledge a.Vocabulary - computer science, Electronics, playing catch, marble, blindman’s bluff, experiment, enjoy, repair, houseappliance, fix, guitar, draw, essay, , excited, bell, ring, indoors, take part in, energetic, swap 2. Structures and grammar - Present simple tense - Present progressive tense + Tobe interested in, Tobe different from 3. Skills: 4 skills II.Teaching methods.

(60) - Community, group work, pair work, some adroitness III.Teaching aids - Text book, cassettes, tape, pictures, board, chalk, real object IV. Anticipated problems: V.Procedures From period 26th to 30th ....................................................................................................................... Week 10 Ngày soạn: 21/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 26/10/2015 Unit 5: Work and play Period 26: Lesson1- A : In class (a 1,2) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Students will be talk about their activities at school What does he/she learn in …………? What’s ………favorite subjects? II.Teaching aids: Extra board, cassette, tape III. Procedures Teacher’s activities Students’activities 1. Warm up.(5') “Network” English - Play game Geography Math Subjects Literature Science Music Physics 2-New lesson. Activity 1 : Listen and read (15') a. Vocabulary: Learn about st. (translation) Be interested in (translation) Computer science (realia) Map (n)(realia) Experiment (n) (explanation) *Checking up: “Matching” b. Model sentences: - What does Nga study in Geography class? She studies maps and learns about diffirent country. - What is her favorite class? Her favorite class is Coputer Science class. *Grammar: Structures : + S be interested in st.. - Read and guess meanings of them then copy down in the notebooks - Check - Listen and copy.

(61) + S be good at st/ V+ ing O. - Ask the S to find the sentences that made up from those structures. + Review the present simple tense . + Adverbs of frequency: Matching. -Practice. - Hang on the pictures. - Ask the S to talk about the content of the picture. - Ask the S to listen to the tape. - Read again. - Ask the S to read it one by one. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask the S to work in pair to practice about Mai. - Feedback. a. Where does Mai study? She studies at Quang Trung School. b. Which grade is she in? She is in grade 7 c. How many days a week does she go to school? She goes to school six days a week, from Monday to Saturday d. What time do Hoa’s classes begin? They begin at 7.00 *Activity 2 Read then answer the questions * Pre reading:10min a. Pre teach vocabulary: - Electronics. (n) (explanation) - Household. (n) (translation) - Appliance. (n) (explanation) - Fix (v) = Repair (v) (pictures) * Checking: “Matching” b. Model sentence: + He is good at fixing lights + I am good at Singing English songs. - Ask Ss to give some more examples. c. Prediction T/F: T F 1.Ba is in class 7A at Quang Trung school. 2.His favorite subject is Physics. 3.He learns to repair household appliances in electronics. 4. He is good at doing his homework. - Devide class into 4 groups and ask them to predict. - Call each group to write their prediction. * While reading:10min. - Find sentences. - Talk about the content of the picture. - Listen to the tape - Ask and answer question about Mai - Read the answer. - Listen and repeat and copy. - Go to BB to match - Listen and copy - Give more examples - Predict T/F. - Write the prediction.

(62) - Read the passage once. - Ask Ss to read in whishper and then check their - Read the passage prediction. Feedback: 1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F - Ask Ss to read the passage again, then answer the questions. Read their answer. - Get Ss to read answers aloud before class. Feedback: a. Ba likes Electronics best. b. Yes, he does. “He enjoys school very much” c. He learns to repair household appliances in electronics. d. He will be able to fix his own appliances. e. Yes, he is. “His drawing are very good” - Translation * Post reading:10min - Devide class into 4 groups. - Translate the passages into Vietnamese G1: From “Ba” to “appliances” G2: From “Now” to “things” G3: From “In” to “school” G4: From “His” to “day” - Correct the mistakes 4- Consolidation: 3min - Hang on the extra board with the test to check their about words and structures. - Go to the board and do - Call some Ss to do on the board. exercise - Ask the S to pratice in pair to talk about themshelves. - Practice in pairs. - Feedback. 5- Homework:2min - Ask the S to learn by heart new words and review structures . - Ask the S to write a passage to introduce their activities at school in their notebooks. - Listen and copy - Ask the S to do ex in ex.book. - Prepare the next lesson. * Comments: ........................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ...................................... ................................................................................................................................ Ngày soạn: 22/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 27/10/2015 Unit 5: Work and play Period 27: Lesson 2 - A : In Class (a3,4) I. Ojectives By the end of the class, Students will be able to do a math question and they will listen a passage to find out the information.

(63) 1. Vocabulary : - To cost (v ) - Right (adj ) - Problem - To erase (v) 2. Grammar Review the present simple tense II. Teaching aids Textbook , cassette , tape III. Procedures : T’s activities 1. Warm up : (8') - Greetings - Play a game : lucky numbers 1. What ‘s Ba ‘s favorite subject ? 2. Lucky number 3. Does Ba like other subject at school? 4. What does Ba learn to do in Electronics class ? 5. LN 6. Is Ba good at fixing things ? 7. What does Ba do in his freetime ? 8. LN 9. What’s your favorite subject ? 10.What do yo do in your freetime ? - Remark 2. New activities 1. Read. Then answer (15') - Introduce the aims of the lesson : Read the dialogue then find out the answer for the question - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silent - Explain some new words to Ss + To cost (v) : + Right (adj) : + Price (n) : + Proplem (n) : + To erase (v) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and invidually - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to read the question and find out the answers - Call on some students to give the answers - Correct then give the correct answer à One banana costs 600 dong 2.Listen then write correct letters next to names (15') - Introduce the aims of the lesson - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of sbject. Ss’ activities - Greetings - Play a game. - 2 groups take part in the game. - Listen to the teacher - Read in silent - Read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down. - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue aloud - Read the question and find the answer - Give the answer - Copy down - Listen to the teacher - Call the names of subjects a/ Geography.

(64) b/ Physical education c/ Computer science d/ Technology e/ Class activities - Guess in groups - Give the predictions - Listen to the tape. - Ask Ss to guess what subject Ba and Hoa do on Saturday ? - Call on some Ss to give then predictions - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and choose the right subjects Ba and Hoa do on Saturday - Play the tape again fod Ss and ask them to write the Listen and write down letters next to the names - Have Ss exchange the results with their parents - Exchange the results - Play the tape again for Ss to check their results - Listen to the tape and check - Call on some Ss to give their answers - Give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers - Write down Ba : d,a,e Hoa : c,b,e - Have Ss answer the questions : - Answer T’s questions + What subjects does Ba have on Saturday ? + What subjects does Hoa have on Saturday ? - Answer T’s questions 3. Consolidation : (5') - Ask Ss some questions about themselves + What subjects do you like ? + When do you have math ? + Do you think math is difficult or easy ? ……. 4. Home work :(2') - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for - Write home work each - Do exercise 3 at page 28 in workbook - Prepare part 5,6,7 * Comments: .......................................................................................................... ...................................................................................... ....................................... ............................................................................................................. ………….. Ngày soạn: 22/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 28/10/2015 Unit 5 : Work and play Period 28 : Lesson 3 : A - Inclass (A5,6,7,Remember) A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about subjects at school, what they study in each subject. They continue pratising reading skill 1. Vocabulary : - Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n).

(65) 2. Grammar : Review : The present simple tense B. Teaching aids : Textbook , cassette,tape,computer and OHP C. Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’activities I. Warm up :5’ - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play agame : - Play a game Hangman : - Literature , History , English - Remark II. New lesson: <5> Read : 23’ - Introduce the lesson to Ss - Ask Ss some questins such as ; - Listen to the teacher +How many subjects do you study at school ? - Answer T’s questions +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ? Why ? - Explain some new words for Ss + essay (n) - Listen and write down + past and present events (n) + author (n) - Have Ss read the passage in silent - Read the passage in silent - Call on some Ss to read the passage in front of the class - Read the passage in front of - Correct the pronunciation the class - Make some questions then ask Ss to answer + What do you study in / literature ? - Answer T’s questions / history ? / Physics ? / Geography ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the content of the passage - Work in pairs - Correct the mistakes - Have Ss look at the part of exercuse then explain the aims of exercise to Ss - Listen to the teacher - Have Ss work in pairs reading and odding the words which are not suitable with each subject - Do exercise in pairs.

(66) - Call on some students to give the answers - Correct the mistakes then give the correct answers + Literature : paitings + History : baseball games + Science : Preposition + English : England - Ask Ss some questions about the subjects + What do you study in literature ? + Do you learn to play baseball in history ? - Have Ss put some more words in the subjects - Remark <6>Match each subject to the correct items :7’ - Explain the aims of the exercuse - Explain some new words to Ss + Graphs (n) + Equation (n) + Caculator (n) + Globe (n) - Have Ss do exercise : Match each subject to the correct items - Have Ss exchange the result with their partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers - Ask Ss some questions such as : What do you do in the P.E class ? What do you do in the Art class ? What do you learn in the math class ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions - Ask Ss to copy down the exercise <7> Play with words : 5’ - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the teacher - Have Ss read after the teacher - Call on some students to read in front of the class - Correct Ss’ pronunciation III. Consolidation :3’ - Have Ss repeat about the subjects which they learnt - Ask Ss to read the part remember aloud. IV. Homework : 2’. - Give the answers - Copy down. - Answer T’s questions. - Put some more words in the subjects - Listen to the teacher - Listen and write down - Read in chorus individually - Do exercise - Exchange the result - Give the answers. - Answer T’s questions - Work in pairs - Copy down - Listen to the teacher - Read after the teacher - Read in front of - Repeat the subjects. and.

(67) - Make sentences with part remember. - Do exercise 4 at page 29 in work book - Prepare part B1,2. - Write home work. * Comments: .......................................................................................................... ............. ......................................................................... ....................................... .............................................................................................................................. Week 11 Ngày soạn: 25/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 02/11/2015 Unit 5 : Work and play Period 29 :Lesson 4 : B - It’s time for recess (B1,2) A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about activities at recess. They will practice reading and listening skills 1. Vocabulary : - To chat (v) - To ring (v) - To skip rope - Bell(n) - Blind man’s bluff - Marbles - Catch (n) - Recess 2. Grammar : Review : The present continuous tense : B. Teaching aids Textbook , cassette,tape,computer and OHP and pictures C.Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play agame : - Play a game Noughts and crosses Math Music Geography 2 groups take part in the game History Literature Electronics English Computer science Physics - Listen carefully. - Ask Ss to make questions and answers Ex : What do you learn in History class? We learn about past and present events ….. II. New lesson. <1> Listen and read : 27’ - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the - Look at the picture carefully.

(68) questions + Where are the students ? + What are they doing ? + Do you like these games ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape . - Explain some new words to Ss + Recess(n) + Bell (n) + Ring (v) + To chat (v) + To skip rope : + Bhind man’s bluff : + Marbles (n) : + Catch(n) : ( Use pictures to introduce new wordds ) - Checking technique : What and where - Remark - Have Ss listen to the tape again & look at the book - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud - Ask Ss to complete the list : Recess activities The most popular activity + meeting friends …… - Call on some Ss to complete the list. and answer T’s questions + They are in the yard + They are playing/// - Listen to the tape - Listen - Guess the meanings read new words in chrous and individually then copy down. - Play a game. - Listen to the tape. - Read the text aloud - Complete the list : * Recess activities : + Meeting friends : + Talking about… + Eating + Dringking + Chatting + Playing catch/ marbles/ blindman’s bluff + Skipping rope a. Work with a partner The most popular activity - Revision of the present continues tense + Talking - Speak about the use, form of the present continues tense - Ask Ss to look at the picture again then work in S + to be + Ving pairs asking anf answering about activities - Work in pairs - Make model S1 : What is this boy doing ? -Listen S2 : He is playing catch + What are these students doing ?  They are talking.

(69) - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of - Practice in front of the class the class - Correct the mistakes if have - Write in the notebook - Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks b. Ask and answer questions with a parter - Listen to the teacher - Explain the aims of the x\exercise to Ss - Answer T’s questions - Make model with a good student :  I usually play catch or talk with + What do you usually do at recess ? my friends + What do you usually do after school ?  I usually play soccer - Have Ss work in pairs - Work in pairs - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice asking and answering class aloud - Correct the mistakes if have 2. Listen : Match each name to an activity : 13’ - Explain the aims of the lesson : - Listen to the teacher Mai, Kien , Lan , Ba are at recess - Review activities at recess - Read the activities in the books - Ask Ss to predict what activity each student is - Predict. playing at recess. - Call on 2 Ss to give their predictions. - Give the prediction. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check the - Listen to the tape and check. prediction. - Play the tape again for Ss to match. - Listen to the tape & match. - Have Ss exchange the result with a partner - Exchange the result - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers - Copy down + Mai is playing catch + Kien is playing blind man’s bluff.. + Lan is skipping rape + Ba is playing marbles III. Consolidation : 3’ - Listen to the teacher - Repeat the activities at recess IV. Homework : 2’ - Write home work - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them - Do exercise 1 at page 30 in workbook - Prepare part B3,4 * Comments: .......................................................................................................... ...................................................................................... ....................................... Ngày soạn: 29/10/2015 Ngày dạy: 03/11/2015 Unit 5 : Work and play.

(70) Period 30 : Lesson 5 : B - It’s time for recess (B3,4,5) A. Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about activities at recess of American students. They continue practicing asking and answering about activities at recess 1. Vocabulary - Pen pal (n) - Junior high school (n) - Energetic (adj) - To swap (v) - To score goal - Portable (adj) - Earphone (n) - To ralax(v) 2. Grammar : Review the present simple tense B.Teaching aids Textbook , cassette,tape,computer and OHP C. Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board - Play game in 2 groups Skip rope Play catch Marbles. Play blin man’s bluff Recess. Bell. ( Each groups has 3 students to take part in the game ). Ring. - Demonstrate the group which wins the game.  Lead in new lesson II. New activities <3> Read. Then answer the questions : 25’ - Ask Ss some questions about activities at recess in VN and in orther continues + What do Vnamese students often do at recess ?. - Clap hands. - Write down - Answer T’s questions - They often play catch (marbles) blind man’s bluff or talk , drink... + Do you know what students in other countries often do at recess? ( or in the USA) - Listen carefully + What activities do you like ? - Explain some new words to Ss + Pen pal (n) : b¹n qua th + Junior hight school (n): trêng THCS - Guess meanings , read new + Energetic (adj) : Năng nổ , hiếu động words in chorus and + To score goal : Ghi bàn individually then copy down.

(71) + Portable (adj): Cã thÓ x¸ch tay + Ear phones (n) : Tai nghe + To swap (v) : Trao đổi + To relax (v) : Th gi·n - Cheking technique : Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to guess what students in the USA often do at recess - Call on some Ss to give their opinions - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape in order to know exatly what American students often do at recess - Have Ss read the text and list the activities the American students often do at recess - Call on some students to give the answers. - Play a game - Guess - Give the opinions - Look at the book and listen to the tape. - Read the text and list the activities… - Give the answers + Play basketball + Listen to music + Read - Correct if necessary + Swap baseball cards - Call on some students to read the text in front of the + eating & talking class - Read the text aloud - Correct their pronunciation *Questions : - Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers - Read the text and find out the answers - Have Ss Exchange the result with their partners - Exchange the results - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers - Copy down a. Hoa’s penpal Tim goes to an American school b. A ( short ) c. D (mostly boys ) d. D (work wide > <4> Take a survery: 7’ - Explain the aims of the leeson - Listen carefully - Have Ss write the form of the survery in the - Write the table in the notebooks notebooks - Introduce ask Ss to complete the table by asking - Listen to the teacher friends some questions such as : What do you do at recess ? Do you play soccer / skiprape….? - Have Ss work in groups of three or four - Work in groups - Call on some representatives to tell about activities - Tell about activities.

(72) of their groups at necess Ex : At recess , Trang skips rope , Trung plays catch with other friends , and Hoa reads books… - Ask Ss to write full sentences in the notebooks - Write full sentences - Call on some students to read their writings in front - Read aloud of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary <5> Play with words : 3’ - Play the tape for Ss - Listen to the tape - Ask Ss to look at the books and read after the tape - Read after the tape - Call on some Ss to read aloud - Read aloud - Correct their pronunciation III. Consolidation : 3’ - Repeat the acivities of American students at recess - Listen - Names of activities at recess in Vietnam. IV. Homework : 2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for - Write home work each - Do exercise 2 at page 31 - Prepare part A1 of Unit 6. * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ........................................ Unit 6: After school. I- Aims:. After this lesson , the students can: - Talk about popular after school activities. - Make suggestions. - Make arrangements. 1. Knowledge. a, Grammar. - Modal verb: - for suggestions. - for invitations. - Modal verb: - Polite refusal/ acceptance of invitations. b,. Vocabulary. - Topic: activities after school. 2. Skills: : 4 skills + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about activities after school and give the invitation , the requests + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen and match the activities after school , listen and practice the dialogue. + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read a text for details about pastime activities.

(73) + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write sentences that use adverbs of frequency II- Teaching method . - Comunitive , Ask – answer, group work, pair work. III. Teaching aids. - Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP IV. Anticipated problems: V – Procedures Form period 31st to 36th Lesson 1 : A1 Lesson 2 : A2 Lesson 3 : A3+4+5+Remember Lesson 4 : B1 Lesson 5 : B2 Lesson 6 : B3+4+5+Remember Ngày soạn: 29/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 04/11/2015 WEEK 11 Unit 6 : After school Period 31: Lesson 1 : A - What do you do ? (A1) A. Objective :After the lesson , students will be able to speak about activities after school and give the invitation , the requests 1. Vocabulary : - invite (v) - practice (v) - come along - Together - maybe 2. Grammar: - Let’s go to the cafeteria! _ Good idea./ OK - Why don’t you come along ? _ Yes, may be I will. - What should we do? B. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP C. Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’activities I. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play a game: Networks - Play a game. After – school activities. - 2 groups take part in the game.

(74) - Have Ss go to the board and write down - Go to the board & write - Demonstrate the group which miss the games II/ New lesson 1. Presentation : 10’ - Ask Ss some questions such as: - Answer T’s questions + What do you often do after school ? - I often play soccer… - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the - Look at the pictures and question : answer: + What are they doing ? - They are playing volleyball -They are doing their homework …..talking - Have Ss listen to the tape - Listen to the tape - Explain some new words and structures - Listen carefully + To invite (v) : mêi - Read new words in chorus + To practice (v) : luyÖn tËp and individually then copy + To come along : ®i cïng down + Together : cïng nhau + maybe + Let’s /go to the cafeteria and get _ Good idea./ OK / a cold drink / invite him + Why don’t you / come along ?_ Yes, may be I will. / play soccer ? + What should we do? - Ask Ss to make sentences using the structures: - Make sentences + Let’s / go to the cinema / Play volley ball + Why don’t you / relax ? / play catch ? 2. Practice: 15’ - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape again - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Answer : - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers. - Listen to the tape - Work in pairs - Practice reading the dialogue. - Read the dialogue and find the answers.

(75) - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers then ask Ss to write down a. She’s doing her math home work b. They are going to get a cold drink in the cafeteria c. He’s in the music room d. He’s learning to play the guitar e. He usually meets his friends f. She likes playing volleyball 3. Further practice : 10’ - Have Ss play a game : Noughts and crosses Lan Do home work These boys Computer games Minh Watch T.V You Listen to music Mai and Hoa Talk The girls Skip rope Nam Long&Minh Ba. - Work in pairs -Practice asking and answering - Copy down. - Play a game. 2 groups make questions and answers with the cues. Play marbles Chat Play the guitar. Model S1 : What is Lan doing ? S2 : She is doing her homework III. Consolidation: 3’ - listen and remember. _ Retell the structures of the invitation and the requests IV. Home work : 2’ - Write home work - Write the answers in part A1 in the notebook. Make 5 questions with each structure - Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ....................................... Ngày soạn: 4/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 09/11/2015 Unit 6:After school Period 32: Lesson 2: A-What do you do?(A2).

(76) A-Objectives : After the lesson, Ss will be able to use adverbs of frequency with the present simple tense for after-school activities 1/Vocabulary: Revision adverbs of frequency: Always, usually ,sometimes ,often, never 2/grammar Review: the present simple tense B / Teaching aids : - Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP C-Procedure: Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss review the old lesson by playing a game - Play a game slap the board called slap the board - Slap in E words - Read these words in Vietnamese +Swim - 2 groups take part in the +Read book game +Watch T.V +Play computer games +Play soccer +Go to the movie - give the result and remark II. new lesson: 1. Presentation:13’ - Ask SS to look at the pictures in the books - Look at the pictures carefully carefully - Have Ss call the names of the pictures - Call the names of the pictures - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers: 1/Reading/studying in the library 2/Swimming in the pool 3/Playing computer games 4/Going to a movie 5/Playing soccer 6/Watching T.V - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about - Work in pairs the pictures - Make model.

(77) What are these students doing? They are reading in the library - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class 3. Practice: 15’ b/Ask Ss the questions What do you usually do after school? - Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses Always Go swimming Often Play computer games Never Go to the library. - Practice in front of the class. - Listen to the teacher than answer I usually play soccer - Play a game in 2 groups.. - Make questions answers with the cues. and. Usually Play soccer Sometimes play computer games Often Go to a movie Usually Watch T.V Often Play tennis Sometimes Do homework. - Write sentences + On Monday, I usually go to the library + On Tuesday , I often play soccer with my friend …. - Work in pairs. - Remark - Ask Ss to use adverbs in the box to write a sentences for each day of the week - Practice in front of. - Answer T’s questions  I always go to the library after school - copy down. - Remark and correct the mistakes Now ask and answer question ,using “How often……?” - Make example with a student +How often do you go to the library? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering ,using the pictures in the book - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Work in pairs - Correct the mistake if have.

(78) 3. Futher practice:7’ - Have Ss do exercise 5 at page 71 of Language focus - Give the information in the table and ask Ss to look at the table then matching : Activities Frequency Go cafeteria never Ride bicycle sometimes Practice guitar often Do home work usually Play computer games always - Call on some Ss to give the result - Correct the mistakes - Ask Ss to write about Ba, using the information Model : - Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time …... - Call on 2 students to go to the board and write down - Remark and give marks III. Consolidation : 3’ - Retell the usage the adverbs of frequency with the present simple tense for after-school activities - Question word : How often IV. Home work: 2’ - Write a sentence for each day of the week , using the adverbs of frequency - Do exercise 2+3 at page 34 in work book - Prepare part 3,4,5. - Practice in front of the class. - Do exercise 5. - Read the information in the table and match. - Give the result - Write sentences about Ba. - Go to the board and writes. - Listen and remember - Write homework. * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ....................................... WEEK 12 Ngày soạn: 5/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 10/11/2015 Unit 6 : After school Period 33 : Lesson 3 : A-What do you do ? ( a3,4,5) I. Objectives: After the lesson , students will be able to read a text for details about pastime activities and listen and match each name to an activity 1/ Vocabulary _Sport(n)_A comic_A president_An anniversary celebration_Collect(v)_ collector(n).

(79) _collection(n) 2/ Grammar : Review _The present simple tense _The progressive tense B. Teaching aids: Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP C. Procedure : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I. Warm up:5’ - Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play a game - Play a game Guessing game - Ask Ss to write sentences about the activity - Write sentences which they play after school Ex : I usually play soccer after school - Guess what their friends do after - Ask one student to go to the board and their school friends guess Ex : Do you play volleyball after - Remark school ? II. New lesson 1. (A3) Read then answer : 15’ - Have Ss look at the pictures and guess what - Look at the picture and guess the students are doing - Give the prediction - Call on some students to give their prediction + Explain some new word : - Listen and write down + Sporty (adj) + Comic (n) + a president + an anniversary celebration Guess meaning, read in chorus + To collect (v) + rehearse(v) and individually then copy down + a collection + collection (n) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually - Play a game - checking vocab What and where - Have Ss do an exercise True or False prediction : - Do exercise in groups 1. Nga, Ba and Nam are students in class 7 A 2. They like sports very much 3. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging 4. Ba like collecting stamps.

(80) 5. Nam plays soccer every afternoon 6. Nam usually watches T.V - Have Ss work in groups to give their predictions - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to look at the book and read in silent - Ask Ss correct the exercise - Correct then give the correct answer 1–T 3–F 5–F 2–F 4–T 6–T - Call on some Ss to read the passage Aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to look at the questions and read the passage again to find out the answers - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a. Her groups is rehearsing a play for the school anniversary celebration b. He gets American stamps from Liz , his American friend c. The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday afternoon d. Nam never plays games - Ask Ss some more questions: + What does Nga like doing after school ? + What do Ba and his friend often do on Wednesday afternoon ? + What do Ba and his friend often do after school hours ? 2. (A4) Listen and match each name to an activity : 13’ - Introduce the aims of the exercise - Ask Ss to read the names and activities - Ask Ss to give their predictions - Have Ss listen to the tape (2 times ) - Call on some Ss to give the results - Play the tape again to check the answers. - Work in groups - Give the predictions. - Read in silent - Correct the exercise. - Read the passage loudly. - Find out the answers - Work in pairs - Practice asking and answering - Copy down. - Answer Teacher’s questions. - Listen carefully - Read - Give the prediction.

(81) - Correct and give the correct answer: - Listen to the tape A – Mai – go to the school cafeteria - Gice the results B – Nam – rehearse a play - Check the answers C – Ba – go to the circers - Write down D – Lan – watch movie E – Kien – tidy the class room 3.(A5) Play with words : 5’ - Have Ss listen to the tape - Ask them to look at the books and read after the tape - Listen to the tape - Call on some Ss to read in front of the class - Read after the tape - Correct their pronunciation III. Consolidation :5’ - Read alouds - Repeat the activities after school - Ask Ss to write a paragraph about after school activities, using matching - Listen - Remark - Write a paragraph IV. Home work:2’ Speak aloud - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 times for each - Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book _Write home work * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ....................................... WEEK 12 Ngày soạn: 6/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 11/11/2015 Unit 6 : After school Period 34 : Lesson 4 : B- Let’s go ( B1 ) A. Objectives By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to make/give suggestions and accept or refuse the suggestions. 1/ Vocabulary : - Assignment (n) - Fun (adj) -come on,It’ll be fun, there aren’t any good movies on at the moment. 2/ Structure : -Let’s + V = What about + Ving ? = Why don’t / we.. ?/ you …? - Responses : - Yes, let’s ; - Good idea / ok ; - Sorry, I can’t B. Teaching aids: Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP C.Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’activities.

(82) I. English test : 15’ 1. Put the words in the correct order to make sentences. a. always/church/he/to/goes/Sundays/on. b.they/free/usually/are/ the/ weekend/on. c.marbles/boys/often/the/recess/ play/at/ do? d.library/I/in/study/school/after/the/sometimes. e.Phong/interested/is/in/always/music. 2. Make questions for the underlined words. a. She goes to school six days a week. b.we learn how to use a computer in computer science. c. Her favorite subjects is English d. They are playing catch in the school yard. e. Classes always begine at seven o’clock. II.New lesson:25’ (B1) Listen then practice in groups of four _Introduce the situation of the dialogue : Ba , Nam,Lan and Hoa are discussing about / What they should do to relax / How they should relax - Have Ss look at the picture and guess what activities they are talking - Call on some Ss to give their predictions - Play the tape for Ss (2 times ) - Call on one student to give the answer - Introduce some new words and structures: + Assignment (n) = home work + Fun (adj) + Suggestions : + Let’s go to my house go to Lan’s house + Why don’t you relax ? + What about going to the movie ? - Have Ss practice the dialogue in front of the class - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class - Correct the pronunciation - Now answer : - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for questions. - do the test in to the paper.. - Listen carefully. - Guess - Give the predictions - Listen to the tape - Look at the books - Give the answer - Listen and write down -Read in chorus and individually. Write Make sentences structures. down. with. - Practice the dialogue. - Practice in front of the class.

(83) - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct then give the correct answers a/ Nam wants to go to the movies b/ Lan doesn’t want to go to the movies because there aren’t any good movies at the moment c/ Lan wants to listen to music at her house d/ Hoa doesn’t want to go to Lan’s house because she has too many assignments e/ It’s Saturday - Practice - Have Ss practice , using given words : 1/ Let’s / listen / music 2/ What / Watch / movie 3/ Why / join us 4/ What / go / cafeteria 5/ Why / study / library Make model : S1 : Let’s listen to some music S2 : Yes , let’s good idea - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary III. Consolidation: 3’ - Give a mapped dialogue then ask Ss to make a dialogue using given words & phrases You Your friend What..do..afternoon ? Movies Not good movie Mai’s house Too far/not have a bike /take a bus Ok. - Read the dialogue then find out the answers - Work in pairs -Practice asking and answering aloud - Copy down. - Practice in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. -Listen & make a dialogue S1 : What should we do this afternoon ? S2 : Let’s go to the movies S1 : There isn’t any good movie on S2 : What about going to Mai’s house ? We can play a game together S1 : But It’s too far. I don’t have a bike S2 : Why don’t we take a bus ? S1 : OK - Work in pairs.

(84) - Have Ss work in pairs -Practice in front of the class - Call on some pairs to make a dialogue in front of the - Write down class - Correct the mistakes then give the correct dialogue IV. Home work: 2’ - Write home work - Make & sentences for each structures - Do exercise 1 at page 35 in work book - Prepare B2 * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ....................................... .................................................................................................................................. WEEK 13 Ngày soạn: 13/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 16/11/2015 Unit 6 : After school Period 35 : Lesson 5 : B-Let’s go ! (B2) A. Objectives: After the lesson , Students will be able to know a magazine survey about the most popular activities of American teenagers and get further practice in leisure vocabulary 1/ Vocabulary _Teenager, top ten,fast food, to attend,youth Organization,musical instrument,model ,scout,guide, coin 2/ Structure : Revision : Present simple tense B. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP C. Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’activities I/ Warm up: 5’ -Greetings - Greetings - Have Ss play a game: Pelmanism - Play a game : Pelmanism Have 6 cards <1> What about <2> Why don’t 2 groups take part in the game <3> Let’s <4> Collect stamps <5> Going to the circus ? <6> You study in the library - Remark - listen II. New lessons.

(85) *Presentation : 20’ - Ask Ss to list the activities that teenagers like to do in their free time - Explain some new words to Ss + Teenager (n) : thiếu nien + Musical instrument (n) : Nhạc cụ + Model (n) : mẫu + Scout (n) : Hướng đạo sinh + Guide (n) : + Coin (n) : Tiền xu + Organization (n) : Tổ chức -Checking vocabulary: Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to predict what American (students) teenagers like to do in their free time - Call on some students to give then predictions - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and call the names of these activities. - List the activities - Listen carefully - Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually Copy down. - Play a game Rub out & remember - Predict. - Give the prediction. - Call the names of activities +Eating-and-drinking + Playing the guitar + Going shopping + Watching T.V + Collecting things + Helping old people - Ask Ss to look at the book and read the text - Read in silent in silent - Have Ss give the names of activities - Give manes - Ask them to compare with their predictions - Remark and call some students to read the - Compare text aloud - Give some comprehension questions: - Read aloud 1/ Which of the activities in the best of American teenagers do you think are also - Answer popular among Vietnamese teenagers ? 2/ Are there many kinds of entertainment for + Watching T.V teenagers in VN ? What are they ? + Listening to music 3/ What organizations are there for teenagers + Going to the movie in VN ? + Helping old people 4/ - Call on some Ss to give the answers.

(86) - Correct the mistakes *Practice: 15’ - Ask Ss to discuss in groups of four -Have Ss ask their friends with out they like - Give the answers doing in their free time, then make a list of their groups favorite leisure activity in front of the class - Work in groups -Call on some groups to read about their - Make a list of the group’s favorite group’s favorite leisure activities aloud leisure activities -Remark then give the most popular activity of the students in class -Compare with the activities of American - Some groups read aloud teenagers III/ Consolidation:3’ - Repeat the top ten most popular activities of Repeat American teenagers IV/ Home work : 2’ - Learn by heart 10 most popular activities - Write down - Do exercise 2 at page 35 in work book - Prepare part 3,4 * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ............................................... Ngày soạn: 13/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 17/11/2015 Unit 6 : After school Period 36:Lesson 6 : B_Let’s go (3,4,5,Remember) I/Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will continue practicing the invitation. They will be able to know how American teenagers help the community 1/ Vocabulary Wedding (n) Elderly people Community service Volunteer (n) Neighborhood clean_up_Campaigns 2/ Structure -Would you like to ….?  Yes, I’d love to That would be great fun I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t - Thanks for inviting me _ It’s my pleasure Thanks anyway. _ You’re wellcome. 3/ Skill. Reading comprehension.

(87) B/ Teaching aids Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP C/ Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’ activitie I/ Warm up : 5’ -Greetings -Greetings -Ask Ss some questions about what they like doing -answer teacher’s questions in their free time -Go to the board and write -Call on some one student to go to the board and down write down the activities of American teenagers bike doing in their free time -Remark and give mark -Write down II/ New lesson: B3> Listen then practice with a partner: 20’ -Ask Ss some questions: -Answer T’s questions + Do you usually use the invitations ? + In which occasions do you use ( Ss can answer the questions these invitations ? in VN ) + How do you accept or refuse the invitations ?  Lead in to new lesson -Introduce the invitation -Listen to the teacher + Would you like to…?  Accept the invitation -Write down Yes, I’d love to That would be great fun  Refuse the invitation I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t -Make example : Would you like to have a drink ? Yes, I’d love to -Have Ss make some sentences as model - Make sentences + Would you like to go to the movie with me ?  I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t -Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape - Listen to the tape (two times ) - Work in pairs -Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue Practice reading the dialogue in -Call on some pairs to role play the dialogue in front of the class front of the class -Correct their pronunciation.

(88) * note : - Thanks for inviting me _ It’s my pleasure -Thanks anyway. _ You’re wellcome. -Have Ss based on the dialogue to make similar dialogue -Have Ss work in pairs -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class -Correct the mistakes for Ss <B4> Read then discuss : 10’ -Ask Ss to tell the things teenagers con do to help the community -Explain some new words and phrases + Community service (n) : giúp đỡ cộng đồng + Elderly people (n) : Người giµ + Stripe : Kẻ sọc + To concern (v) : Liªn quan + Environment (n) : M«i trường + Neighborhood : hµng xãm. -Checking vocab : Rub out and remember -Ask Ss to read the passage to find out the activities which teenagers help the community -Call on some Ss to give the answer -Correct and give the correct answers : + Help olderly people + Work as hospital volunteer + Work on neighborhood clean_up campaigns -Call on some Ss to read the passage -Class discuss : -Ask Ss to read the two questions then discuss in groups -Call on some groups to give the answers in front of the class -Correct the mistakes B5/ Play with words: 5’ - play the tape twice - Ask ss to read it aloud. III/ Consolidation :3’ -Repeat the structures of invitation and activities teenagers can help the community IV/ Home work : 2’ -Learn by heart new words & remember by making. - listen and copy -Make similar dialogue -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class. -Tell the things teenagers can do : -Listen carefully -Read in chorus and individually, guess meaning then write down. -Read the passage and find the activities which teenagers help the community -Give the answers. -Read the passage aloud -Discuss in groups -Give the answers in front of the class. - listen and repeat - read aloud (whole class0 -Listen carefully.

(89) sentences. - copy down. * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 13/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 18/11/2015 Period 37:Language focus 2 A/ Objectives: By the end of the lesson ,Ss will review the knowledge which have been learnt from unit 4 to unit 6 such as : - The present continuous tense - Time and subject vocabulary -This, that , these , those -Adverbs of frequency -Making suggestions B/ Teaching aids Textbook , tape , computer and OHP….. C/ Procedure Teacher’s activities Students’activities I/ Warm up : 5’ -Greetings Greetings -Have Ss play a game -play game Mini game + Brainstorm the activities at recess + In pairs , Ss mine the + Call on some of the students to present in front of activities to each other the class + Present to each other + Ask Ss to make sentences a loud activities in the + Present in front of the class present continuous tense Make some sentences -Remark II/ New lesson: 1/ Present progressive tense : 7’ -Give the formation and use Ask Ss to give the formation and use of the present + S + am/is/are + Ving continuous tense - S + am /is/are + not + Ving ? ? Am/is/are + S + Ving Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at the time at present -Make sentences We are learning E now.

(90) -Have Ss make sentences. -Ask Ss to do exercise 1 -Have Ss exchange the result with their partners -Call on some Ss to give their answers -Correct & give the correct answers: + is doing + is writing + is reading + is cooking + are playing + is kicking + is sunning 2/ This & that, these & those : 5’ -Ask Ss to give the use of this, that, these, those -Ask them to look at the pictures carefully and complete the dialogue -Call on some Ss to do exercise in front of the class -Correct & give the correct answers: b/ Put this bag away That isn’t my bag ,mum This is my bag c/ Put those dirty socks (on the bed) in the washing basket. These socks ? No, those socks on the bed d/ Throw away those comics But, I like these comics ,mom 3/Time : 5’ -Ask Ss to look at the clocks in the book then call the time -Have Ss complete the dialogues in the books -Ask them to work in pairs -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class -Correct the mistakes 4/ Vocabulary : Subjects : 8’ Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures in the books and call the correct subject names -Have some Ss to give the subject names in front of the class. He is reading a book -Do exercise 1 -Exchange the results -Give the answers -Copy down. -Give the use -Look at the pictures and complete the dialogue -Do exercise -Copy down-. -Look at the clocks and call the time -complete the dialogues -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class. -Look at the pictures and call the correct names -Give the subject names.

(91) -Correct the mistakes & give the correct answers a/ Physical education b/ Chemistry c/ Math d/ Geography e/ English f/ History 5/ Adverbs of frequency : 5’ -Have Ss look at the table and ask them to write sentences about Ba, using adverbs of frequency -Make example : Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time -Ask Ss to write four sentences about Ba -Have Ss exchange the results with their friends -Call on some Ss to give the answers aloud -Correct and give the correct answers + Ba seldom rides a bike to school + Ba always practices the guitar after school + Ba usually does his home work in the evening + Ba sometimes plays computer games 6/ Making suggestions : 5’ -Have Ss look at the table -Ask them to read the short dialogues -Have Ss make similar dialogues using given words or phrases -Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. -Correct the mistakes if necessary III/ Consolidation: 3’ - Remark the main structures - The present continuous tense - Time and subject vocabulary -This, that , these , those -Adverbs of frequency -Making suggestions IV/ Homework: 2’ -Review from unit 4 to unit 6 -Do test yourself 2. -Copy down. - Look at the table and write sentences about Ba -Listen -Write 4 sentences about Ba -Exchange the results -Give the answers -Copy down. -Look at the table -Read dialogues -Make dialogues in pairs -Practice in front of the class S1 : Let’s play volleyball S2 : Ok S1 : Would you like to watch movies ? S2 : I’ d love to - listen and remember. Write homework.

(92) * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 29/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 23/11/2015 Period 38 : Written Test I/ Objectives : The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will know each student and class’s knowledge and have the method to teach. B. Preparing : - Teacher : prepare a written test - Students: Review C/ The content of the test : Ma trËn : Chủ đề NhËn biÕt Th«ng hiÓu VËn dông Tæng KQ TL KQ TL KQ TL I. Listening 5 5 2.5 II. Reading. 2. 2.5 4. 6.

(93) 0,5 III. Language. 2.5 12. 4. focus IV.Writing Tæng. 2.0. 8 2,0. 1.0. 3.0 4. 8 2.0. 7. 4 3.0. 4 2.0. 4 2.0. 2.0 27. 2.0. 10. 4 1.0. I/Listen to the passage and fill in the missing information.(2,5pts) 1............................ 2.............................. 3............................... Hue Street. 4 .......................... Tran Phu School. 5................................ * Tapescript: Tran Phu is my school . It is on Hue street. It is between the restaurant and the shoe store .The shoe store is on the right and the restaurant is on the left. There is a book store opposite my school .It is very big .You can buy many types of books there . Next to the book store on the right is the clothing store .The bakery is to the left of the book store .It is opposite the restaurant. II/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1 p) 1. Lan and Hoa ( read ) in the library at the monent 2. We (not come ) here tomorrow morning 3. Nam (go) to the E club every Saturday 4. You can (find) the match books on the racks in the middle III/ Choose the best answers (2ps) 1/__does Lan have science class ? At 8:40 a/ When b/ What time c/ How long 2/ Those books at the __of the library are in English a/ front b/ back c/ Shelf 3/ In the USA , students__school uniforms a/ Wear b/ Wearing c/ Don’s wear 4/ They are interested__literature a/ on b/ at c/ in 5/ Ba learns to repair house hold appliances in__class a/ Physcics b/ Electronues c/ Biology 6/ __do you go to the library ? once a week a/ How long b/ How often c/ How 7/ There aren’t __good movies at the moment a/ any b/ many c/ some 8/ Would you like __to my house for lunch ? a/ come b/coming c/ to come.

(94) IV/Complete the sentences, using the cues given. (2,0p) 1. Where do you live?(address) -> What ...............................................................................? 2. The blue dress is cheaper than the red one. -> The red dress is ..................... ......................................... 3. Why don't we play marbles? ->Let's .............................................................................. 4. When is your birthday? -> What’s ........................... ............................................? V. Read the following passage and answer the questions below (2,5 ps): This is the library in Nam’s school. It is not very large, but it is very nice. In the library, there are a lot of books, novels, readers, magazines, newspapers and pictures. There is also a study area. The library opens at 7 o’clock in the morning and closes at 4.30 in the afternoon. Nam often goes there. He likes reading books in the library. *True or Fall?(0,5P) 1. There is a library in Nam’s school. 2. Nam never goes to the library. *Answer the questions below:(2,0P) 1. Is the library in Nam’s school large ? ……………………………………………………………. 2. What time does the library open ? ……………………………………………………………… 3. What time does the library close ? ………………………………………………………….…… 4. What does Nam like doing in the library ? ……………………………………………………………………. _ The end _ * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 19/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 24/11/2015 Period 39: Correct the Test A. Objectives: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English. B. Teaching aids : Test papers, chalk, board. C. Procedure: I / Remark the good and bad of the test and correct some common mistakes . 1. Teacher's remark: a. Advantages: - Some ss prepare for the test quite well:………….

(95) - Some ss understand the knowledge in the test and know how to do the test. - Some ss get good marks:……….. b. Disadvantages: - Ss don't remember the grammar, model sentences, new words ... - The ss's attitude in learning is not good:………. 2. Return the ss' paper sheets. - Ask ss to look at their test carefully and check their mistakes. - Explain the ss 's complain if they have. ( marks, ...) 3. Mark Class 0-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 7A 7B II Correcting the test I/Listen to the passage and fill in the missing information.(2,5pts) 1) the bakery 2) book store 3) clothing store 4) restaurant 5) shoe store II.Give the correct form of verbs(1 p) 1.are reading 2.won’t come 3.goes 4.find III.Choose the best answer(2ps) 1.b.What time 2.B.back 3.C.don’t wear 4.C.in 5.B.Electronices 6.B.How often 7.A.any 8.C.to come IV/Complete the sentences, using the cues given. (2,0p) 1. What is your address? 2. The red dress is more expensive than the blue one. 3. Let's play marbles. 4. What is your date of birth? V. Read the following passage and answer the questions below (2,5 ps): *True or Fall?(0,5P) 1. T 2- F *Answer the questions below:(2,0P) 1. No, it isn't 2. It opens at 7 o'clock. 3. It closes at 4.30 pm..

(96) 4. He likes reading books in the library. * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ............................................... Unit 7: The world of work I .Aims: After finishing the unit Ss will be able to Talk about their study Holidays, typical work day Compare the differences between a Vietnamese’s day work and an Americian’s day work Have good attitudes to studying, respect other labol jobs 1. Knowledge: a)Vocabulary - Some names of holidays, spend, more,less, fewer, keen, take care of, homless, shift, days off, rest, crop b)Structures Comparative Simple present. 2. Skills: Listening , speaking, reading, writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about a student’s work and holiday in Viet Nam and a student’s work and holiday in American . Compare the differences between a Vietnamese’s day work and an Americian’s day work. + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen and fill in the information, listen and practice the dialogue. + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read a text or a letter about a student’s work and holiday in Viet Nam and a student’s work and holiday in American and answer the questions. And compare the differences between a Vietnamese’s day work and an Americian’s day work. + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write sentences that use comparatives I. Teaching methods - Communicative, substitutions,Eliciting , pair work , group work or work individually. II. Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures of holidays III. Anticipated problems: - Communicative with nouns. IV. Procedures From period 40th to 44th -Lesson 1:A1 -Lesson 2:A2+3 -Lesson 3:A4+Remember -Lesson 4:B1.

(97) -Lesson 5:B2+3+4+5+Remember Ngày soạn: 12/11/2013 Ngày dạy: 18/11/2013 Week 14 Unit 7 : The world of work Period 40 :Lesson 1: A_A student’s work (A1) I/ Objectives After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about a student’s work and practice comparatives with fewer and more 1/ Vocabulary : - Hour (n) - To last (v) - Hard -Late later -Early  Earlier -Few  Fewer -many  more 2/ Grammar Review the present tense Structure : - Take time to do. - For how many hours a day…… - that takes about 2 hours each day B/ Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP…….. C/ Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I/ Warm up : 5’ -Greetings -Greetings -Ask some questions about themselves -Answer T’s questions + What time do your classes start ?  They start at + What time do they finish ? They finish at + How many hours a day do you do your home work  Remark and lead in new lesson : II. New lesson. 1/ Presentation : 15’ - Introduce the lesson “ You will hear a - Listen carefully conversation between Hoa and her uncle about school work “ -Explain some new words : - Listen and write down + An hour (n).

(98) + To last (v) + Hard + Late  Later + Early  earlier + Few  fewer + Many  more - Have Ss play a game Rub out and remember - Have Ss predict the answers ,using questions a,b,c,d a/ What time do Hoa’s classes start and finish b/ Do your classes start earlier or later ? c/ How many hours a day does Hoa do her homework ? d/ Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa ? - Ask Ss to work in groups - Call on some representative to give their predictions - Presentation dialogue - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape - Ask them to read the dialogue a gain and check their predictions - Remark - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to role play the dialogue in front of the class - Correct the pronunciation - Questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions -Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Her classes start at 7 o’clock b/ They finish at a quarter past eleven c/ She does her home work 2 hours a day d/ She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation 2/ Practice : 20’ - Explain the structures. - Guess meanings, read in chorus and individually  copy down. - Play game - Predict the answers. +Work in groups - Give the predictions. - Look at the book & listen to the tape - Read the dialogue and check the prediction -Work in pairs -Practice the dialogue in front of the class. - Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class -Copy down. - Listen carefully and write.

(99) +Take time to do. down + For how many hours day…… +that takes about 2 hours each day = It takes Hoa about 2 hours to do her home work each day  It takes Sb to make examples - Make examples - Ask Ss to make examples - Write down - Give word cue to drill + Hoa’s classes : 7:00 Our classes : 6:45 + The film : 9:30 + The play : 10 :00 + Hoa (work ) : 2 hours Miss Mai : 4 hours Make example - Listen S1 : Hoa’s classes start later than our classes S2 : Our classes start earlier than Hoa’s classes - Work in pairs - Have Ss work in pairs - Practice in front of the class - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes 3/ Production - Make sentences Ask Ss to make sentences comparing their work with Hoa’s work using earlier/later/fewer/more. - Exchange the results - Have Ss exchange the results with their partners - Read aloud - Call on some students to read then sentences aloud - Remark III/ Consolidation: 3’ - Remark the main contend of the lesson. - listen and remember. IV/ Home work: 2’ - Learn by heart new words and structures. + Do exercise 1 at page - Doexercise 1/ 48 in work book * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ Ngày soạn: 25/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 30/11/2015 Unit 7 : The world of work Period 41 :Lesson 2 : A-A student’s work (A2,3).

(100) A/ Objectives. By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to compare American students’ vacations and Vietnamese students’ vacations. Practicing reading and listening skills 1/ Vocabulary -To celebrate (v) -Easter (n) -Thanks giving -New year ‘s Eve -Independence Day Christmas 2/ Grammar : -Review _The present simple tense _Comparative with later/earlier/fewer/more B/ Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP…….. C/ Procedures: Teacher’s activities Students’activities I/ Warm up & check: 7’ -Greetings -Greetings -Have Ss play a game : -Play a game Pelmanism Early/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / later / fewer -Device the class into 2 groups -Ask them to play game -Remark -Play game II/ New lesson: <A2> Read them answer the questions: 18’ -Introduce the situation of the lesson Present some new words: -Listen carefully + To celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm -Listen + Easter : -Guess meanings, read new + Thanks giving : worlds in chorus and + New year’s Eve : individually  copy down + Independence Day : + Christmas -Correct their pronunciation -Checking technique -Have Ss play again What and Where -Play game -Ask Ss to do exercise T or F before reading the letter -Do exercise 1/ Vietnamese students have fewer vacation than.

(101) American students 2/ American students have the longest vacation in winter 3/ They don’t have a Tet holiday 4/ their most important vacation is New year’s day 5/ They usually spend their time with their families on Thanks giving and Christmas Day -Call on some groups to give their predictions -Ask Ss to look at the book and read the letter -Ask them to check their predictions -Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class -Correct and give the correct answers 1–T 2–F3-T 4–F 5–T -Call on 2  3 students to read the letter aloud -Questions : -Have Ss work in pairs -Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class -Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers a/ Summer vacation in the longest in America b/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family c/ Vietnamese students have fewer vacations than American students -Have Ss fill in the grids Vacations Vietnamese students American students Longest vacation Tet holiday Thanks giving Christmas Independence Day Easter New year’s / Eve Day In the summer V X. -Work in groups predicting the statements T or F. -Give the predictions -Read the letter -Check the predictions -Give the answers. -Read the letter aloud. -Work in pairs -Practice in front of the class -Copy down. - Fill in the grids. - Write notebooks. down. in. the.

(102) X September 2nd X Lunar December 30th In the summer X V V July 4th V January 1st <A3> Listen. Write the name : 15’ - Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully -Ask Ss to predict the name of each picture-. - Look at the pictures carefully Predict the names of each pictures - Play the tape for Ss ( 2times) - Listen to the tape - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the - Match the name with the class pictures -Correct and give the correct answers - Listen & check the answers a/ Thanks giving -Give the answers b/ Independence Day - Copy down c/ New year’s Eve d/ Christmas III/ Consolidation: 3’ - Repeat the names of the - Ask Ss to repeat (about) the names of the public public holidays holidays in American and Vietnamese IV/ Home work: 2’ - Write home work - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 times for each - Do exercise 4 at page 44 in workbook -Prepare part 4 * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Week 15 Ngày soạn: 26/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 1/12/2015 Unit 7 : The world of work Period 42: Lesson 3 : A-A student’s work (A4,Remember) A/ Objectives:.

(103) After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a typical student’s life. They will continue practicing reading comprehension 1/ Vocabulary : - To review -Typical -Keen -Lazy -Period -To take a look 2/ Grammar Review : _The present simple tense _Comparatives with few/many B/ Teaching aids: - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP…….. C/ Procedures : Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I/ Warm up : 5’ - Greetings -Greetings - Have Ss play a game -Play a game Net work American public holidays -Divide the class into 2 groups - Call on 2 students represented for their groups to go to the board and write down - Remark II> New lesson: 1/ Pre-reading :13’ - Ask Ss some questions about them selves + What do you do every day ? + How many hours a day do you study ? + Do you have to do a lot of home work ? + (Have) Introduce the situation of the lesson - Explain some new words + period + To review + Typical + Keen + Lazy. - 2 students go to the board and write. - Answer T’s questions. - Listen to the teacher - Listen carefully Guess meanings, read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down.

(104) + To take a look + Definitely - Have Ss play a game - Remark _Ask Ss to predict the information about Hoa 1/ Hoa goes to school __day a week 2/ She has__periods a day 3/ She works__hours a week 4/ She has about__ hours of home work every week 5/ Before test , she works __hours a week - Have Ss work in groups - Call on some representatives to give the predictions II/ While_reading: 15’ - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape - Ask them to read the text in silent and check their prediction - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers 1/ 6 days 2/ 5 period 3/ 20 hours 4/ 12 hours 5/ 45 hours - Call on 3 4 students to read the text aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Questions _Ask Ss to read the text again & find ort the answers - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1/ Why do some people think that students have an easy life ? 2/ Lucky number 3/ Does Hoa have to work at home ? 4/ Does Hoa work fewer hours than most workers ? 5/ How many hours a week do you work ? 6/ Lucky number 7/ How many hours a week does she work before. - Play game - Predict the information about Hoa. - Work in groups - Give the predictions. - Listen to the tape - Read & check the prediction - Give the answers. -Read the text aloud. -Read the text then find put the answers -Play game in groups. - Answer the questions based on the text.

(105) tests ? 8/ How many work fewer or more than Hoa? _Remark 3/ Post_reading: 7’ - Ask Ss some questions : + What do you think of a student’s life ? - Answer T’s questions + Do you think students are lazy ? - Remark III/ Consolidation: 3’ - Remark the main contend of the lesson. - listen and remember. IV/ Home work:2’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for - Write home work each -Write the answer in the notebooks - Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book - Prepare part B1 * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 27/11/2015 Ngày dạy: 2/12/2015 Unit 7 : the world of work . Period 43:Lesson 4 : B- The worker (b1) A. Objective: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Tim’s Parents ‘job and the time they work in a week . They continue practicing reading comprehension . 1. Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) 2. Grammar : Review : the present simple tense B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP…….. C . Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5min - Greetings . -Greetings . - Ask students some questions about Hoa and -Answer T’s questions themselves ..

(106) + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ? ……………. - Remark II.New lesson: 1. Pre - reading :10 min -Introduce the situation of the lesson -Explain some new words or phrases : + To take care of ( v ) = to look after + To work part – time +Mechanic ( n ) + Machine ( n ) + Shift ( n ) + Homeless ( adj )  Checking vocab  : Play a game : What and where  Ordering the main ideas : - Ask Ss to predict the order of the main ideas a. Mr Jones’s work . b. Tim’s introduction of his family. c. Mr Jones’s vacation time . d. Mrs. Jones’s work . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to give their predictions in front of the class. 2. While- speaking : 13 min - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape . - Ask Ss to read the letter then check their predictions. -Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class - Correct and give the correct answers 1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C -Call some Ss to read the letter in front of the class -Correct the pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the book . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers :. - Listen to the teacher - Listen and write Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down. Play a game : what and where . - Predict the order of the main ideas .. - Work in pairs - Give the predictions .. - Look at the book and listen to the tape - Read the letter and check the prediction - Give the answers. - Read the letter in front of the class. -Work in pairs - Practice in front of the class.

(107) a. Mrs. Jones works at home . But three mornings a . week she works part – time at a local supermarket. - Copy down. b. She cooks for homeless people once a week c. Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines in a factory . d. He works about 40 hours a week . e. The Jones family always goes to Florida on vacation . They have a great time there . 3.Post – reading : 7 min Ask Ss to base on Tim’s letter to write a letter with the information about their own family. - Ask Ss to exchange their letters with their partners - Write a letter about their - Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the own family . class. - Exchange the letters - Correct the mistakes if necessary . with the partners III. Consolidation :3 min - Read the letter in front of -Ask Ss to repeat the work of the Jones family . the class . - Remark IV.Homework : 2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines with each . - Repeat the Jones family ‘ - Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in workbook. work . - Prepare part 2,3 - Write homework . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ Week 16 Ngày soạn: 2/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 07/12/2015 Unit 7 : The world of work Period 44 : Lesson 5 : B- The worker ( 2,3,4,5,Remember ) A . Objective After the lesson , the students continue practicing reading skill and comparative with fewer , less and more . 1. Vocabulary : - To feed ( v ) - Main crop ( n ) - To grow ( v ) - Buffalo shed ( n ) -To rest ( v ) - Chicken coop ( n ).

(108) 2.Grammar : Review : comparative with fewer / less / more B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP…….. C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings -Ask students some questions about The Jones + How many people are there in Tim’s family? + What does Tim’s father do? + How many hours a week does Mr. Jones work? + How many public holidays does he have ? ………………. - Remark and give marks . II. New lesson: 1. Presentation : 15 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture answer the question : Can you guess what the man does ? What are the daily duties of a farmer ? -Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Explain some new words to Ss. + To feed ( v ) : + To rest ( v ) : + Main crop ( n) : + Buffalo shed ( n ) : + Chicken coop ( n ) : + Real ( adj ) : * Checking vocab: : Rub out and remember . - Give some questions about Mr. Tuan and ask Ss to guess the answers . + Does Mr. Tuan work more hours than Tim’s father ? + What time does he start work ? + What time does his work finish ? + How many vacations does Mr. Tuan have ? -Call some Ss to give their prediction . 2. Practice: 18 min. Students’ Activities - Greetings - Answer T’s questions .. - Answer the questions :. He is a farmer . - Listen to the teacher . - Listen and write . Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down.. - Play game - Guess the answers ..

(109) - Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan then check their predictions . - Give the prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Read the text and check the predictions . - Give the answers a. Yes, he does. - Call some Ss to read the text aloud . b. He starts work at 6: 00 - Correct the pronunciation . c. His work finishes at 6 pm b. Compare : d. He has no real vacations . - Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan again and - Read the text aloud . the letter of Tim then make note about them . - Read the text about Mr. Tuan and the letter then make - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . note. - Exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . - Give the result in front of - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answer the class. III. Consolidation : 5 min - Ask Ss to use the information about Mr. Tuan and Mr. Jones to write sentences , using -- Write down . comparative . - Example : - Listen . Mr. Tuan works more hours than Mr. Jones . Or : Mr. Jones works fewer hours than Mr. Tuan. - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write - .Go to the board and write . down . Mr. Jones has more - Correct the mistakes and ask them to write in vacations than Mr. Tuan. the notebooks . Or: Mr. Tuan has fewer V.Homework : 2 min vacations than Mr. Jones . - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for - Write in the notebooks . each . - Write homework . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ...................................................................................... ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... UNIT 8: PLACES I.Aims - After finshing the unit Ss will be able to + Ask for and give directions/ distances + Make purchases.

(110) + Inquire about prices + make inquirement politely +Know how to communicate with others politely. 1. Knowledge. a.Vocabulary - National bank of Vietnam, Saint Paul hospital, souvenir, shoe store, go straight ahead, turn left/ right, preposition of position and direction b.Contents modal: could How far..? Would like + infinitive Would like + noun How much ? Need to do something/ need doing something 2. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading, writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to practice asking for and giving directions to the places and prepositions of place and practice asking and answering about distances between two places with “ How far …” + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen and fill in the information of the price, listen and practice the dialogue. + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read a text and answer the questions, read and complete the dialogue + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write sentences that ask for and give directions/ distances and prices II.Teaching methods - Communicative, substitutions, some adroitnesses III.Teaching aids - Cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, textbook, pictures about the famous places and post office IV.Procedures From period 45th to 49th -Lesson 1:A1+A2 -Lesson 2:A3 -Lesson 3:A4+5 -Lesson 4:B1+B2 -Lesson 5:B3+4+5+Remember Ngày soạn: 3/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 8/12/2015 UNIT 8: PLACES Period 45 : Lesson 1 : A- Asking the way ( A1,2 ) A.Objective - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer the way to the places . From that they will apply it in the life . 1. Vocabulary : - National bank of Vietnam -A souvenir shop.

(111) - Saint Paul hospital - Go straight ahead -Hanoi railway station - take a first street 2. Grammar : Could you tell me how to get there ? Could you show me the way to …….? B.Teaching aids.: Textbook , tape , cassette , computer, OHP, pictures about the famous places C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words BKAN LOIPHATS TOHEL NSTOAIT TAMREK TOSP FEIFCO - Call 2 students to go to the board and rearrange these words . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer : BANK HOSPITAL HOTEL STATION MARKET POST OFFICE II. New lesson: 1.Presentation : 15 min * Name the places : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book carefully . - Have Ss call the names of the pictures . - Call some Ss to give the answer in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answer : a. National bank of Vietnam b. Saint Paul hospital c. Hotel . d. The central post office e. Hanoi railway station f. Dong xuan market A2.Listen and repeat.Then practice the dialogue with a partner . - Ask Ss to look at the book and answer the questions : Who are they ? Where are they ?. - Greetings . - Play a game .. - Rearrange the jumbled words. - Look at the pictures carefully - Call the names of the pictures - give the answer - Write down .. - Look at the book and answer the questions ..

(112) What does the tourist want ? - Introduce the situation : A tourist is asking the way . - Present some new words and structures : + A souvenir shop ( n ) + Could you tell me how to get there ? + Could you show me the way to the supermarket? +Go straight ahead . Take the first street . + Go straight to the first street . Turn left . - Ask Ss to make sentences with the structures .. - Listen to the teacher . - Listen and write .. Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down . - Make sentences . S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the theater ? S2 : Go straight ahead . Turn left . It’s on your right .. 2. Practice: 20 min - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : - Look at the book and listen to Where does the tourist want to go ? the tape . - Call on one student to answer the question - Answer the question : He wants to get to a souvenir _ Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the shop . tape . - Read after the tape . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to read in front of the - Work in pairs . class . - Practice in pairs in front of the - Correct the pronunciation. class. - Give some places and ask Ss to practice in pairs . - Practice in front of the class Rong market , Post office . S1: Could you show me the way - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the to Rong market ? class . S2: Go straight ahead . Turn left . - Correct the mistake if necessary . It’s on your right . III.Consolidation : 3 min - Ask Ss to practice asking and answering the way to the places in their neighborhood . - Practice in pairs asking and - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the answering the way . class. - Practice in front of the class - Remark and repeat the structures about asking the way . - Listen to the teacher . IV.Homework : 2 min - Learn by heart new structures by making 3.

(113) sentences with them . - Do exercise 1 at page 47 in workbook . - Prepare part 3.. - Write homework .. * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK 17 Ngày soạn: 8/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 14/12/2015 UNIT 8 : PLACES Period 46 : A_Asking the way ( A3 ) A. Objective - The students will continue to practice asking for and giving directions to the places and prepositions of place . - Practice speaking and writing skills . - The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way . B. Teaching aids . - Textbook , tape , cassette , computer, OHP, pictures about the famous places C. Procedure . Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks . - Play a game : Networks. Prepositions of places. - 2 groups take part in the game .. - Go to the board and write - Call 2 students from 2 groups to go to the down . board and write down . - Remark . II. New lesson: 1. Presentation : 15 min - Look at the street map carefully - Ask Ss to look at the street map carefully . - Call the places in the street - Ask them to call the places in the street map map. . - Say about the places’ positions. - Have Ss say about the places’ positions . - Listen carefully . - Introduce the question and answer about the.

(114) places . Example : Where is the bank ? The bank is between the hotel and the restaurant . It’s opposite the hospital . 2. Practice : 20 min - Ask Ss to look at 8 places in the box and the street map . Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about these places . - Call some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .. - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to look at the street map again . - Explain the aims of the exercise to Ss : Listen to the directions then find out the places . - Make model : Go straight ahead to the third street , turn right , what is between the movie theatre and the bakery ? It’s toy store . - Play the tape for Ss ( 2 or 3 times ) - Ask them to exchange the results with their partners . - Play the tape again for Ss to check the results - Correct the mistake then give the correct answers . a. Souvenir shop b. Shoe store c. Hotel d. Drugstore e. Hospital. - Look at 8 places in the box and the street map . - Work in pairs . -Practice in front of the class S1 :Where is the police station ? S2: The police station is between the post office and museum . It’s opposite the stadium . S1: Where is the shoe store ? S2: The shoe store is between the restaurant and the hotel . It’s opposite the supermarket. - Look at the street map again . - Listen carefully .. -Listen to the tape carefully - Exchange the result with the partner . - Listen to the tape then check the answer . - Write down ..

(115) 3. Give some places for Ss to practice : Restaurant / museum / book store - Give the directions to these - Ask Ss to give the directions to these places places . . - Give the directions in front of the class . - Call on some Ss to give the directions in front of the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . III. Consolidation : 3 min - listen and remember. - Remark : The simple present tense with the Structures of asking and answering the way . IV.Homework : 2 min - Write homework . - Write the directions to 8 places in the box . - Do exercises in BTBS . -Prepare part 4,5 . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 9/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 15/12/2015 UNIT 8 : PLACES Preiod 47 : A - Asking the way( A4,5,Remember ) A.Objective: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice asking and answering about distances between two places with “ How far …” 1.Vocabulary : _ A long way _ Have a guess _ Coach 2.Structure : It takes + time + to get ……. How far is it from …….to …….? B. Teaching aids . - Textbook , tape , cassette , computer, OHP, pictures ….. C. Procedure Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 words ) - Play a game : Hangman . + The first word has 6 letters . It is used + How far for asking about distance ..

(116) + The second word has 5 letters . It is used for measuring distances . + The third word has 8 letters . It is also used for measuring distance. - Remark . II. New lesson: 1.Presentation : 15 min a. Listen and repeat . Then practice the dialogue with the partner. -Introduce the aim of the lesson , then explain some new words and structures . + A long way ( n ) + Have a guess + Coach ( n ) + It takes about 18 hours to get there by coach . - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape . -Ask Ss some questions about distance using : how far is it from……….to…………? Example : How far is it from your house to school ? How far is it from Nam Dinh to Ha Noi ? 2. Practice : 16 min - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and read after the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .. + meter + Kilometer. -Listen to the teacher carefully . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down . -Look at the dialogue and listen to the tape . -Answer T’s questions. It’s about one kilometer . It’s about 90 kilometers .. -Listen to the tape and read after the tape . -Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the -Practice in front of the class . class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to answer the question : -Answer the question : How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi Minh city ? It’s about 1,030 km. How far is it from Hue to Ha noi ? It’s about 680 km . b. Look at this table of distances in km . Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the map and the table in the -Look at the map and the table book carefully . carefully . - Make example : -Listen carefully . How far is it from Vinh to Hanoi ? It’s about 319 km _ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering - Work in pairs ..

(117) about the distances . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks . III. Consolidation : 7 min * Ask Ss to practice in pairs , using the street map about the stores and the table b in language focus 3 , then make a conversation about giving direction . - Make example : S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the bookstore from the library ? S2 : Go straight ahead to the park , take the first street on the left and go along Hue street . The bookstore is between the minimart and the restaurant . S1 : How far is it from the library ? S2 : about 500 meters . S1 : thank you . S2 : You’re welcome . - Ask them to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake and ask them to write down IV. Home work : 2 min - Do exercise 2 at page 48 in work book . - Prepare part B1. -Practice in front of the class. -Write down .. -Listen carefully .. -Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write down .. - Write homework .. * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 10/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 16 /12/2015 UNIT 8 : PLACES Period 48 : B- At the post office ( B1, 2 ) A. Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to give the requirements . They will practice asking and answering about the price . 1. Vocabulary :.

(118) - Envelope ( n ) - Altogether ( adv ) - to send ( v ) - Change ( n ) - To mail ( v ) - to receive ( v ) 2. Structures : - I’d like to + V + …….. - How much does/ do + S + cost ? - How much is / are + S ? B. Teaching aids . - Textbook , tape , cassette , computer, OHP, pictures about the post office C. Procedure Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer the questions Where do you often buy stamps ? ( Ss can answer the questions Which services are supply at the post office ? in Vietnamese ) - Remark and lead in the new lesson . - Listen carefully . II. New lesson: 1. Presentation : 15 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce some - Look at the picture and listen services at the post office such as : sending letters , carefully . sending and receiving parcels , money , buying envelopes , stamps ….then explain some new words and structures : + Envelope ( n ) : phong b× Guess the meanings , read + To send ( v ) : göi new words in chorus and + To mail ( v ) : göi th. individually , then copy + To receive ( v ) : nhËn down . + change ( n ) : tiÒn lÎ, tiÒn thõa . + Altogether ( adv ) : tæng céng * Checking technique : Slap the board . - Play game : Slap the board * Structures: + I’d like to + V …. + How much is / are + S ? Example : I’ d like to send this letter to the USA ? How much is the shirt ? It’s 2,000 dong How much are these envelopes ? they are 5,000dong - Ask Ss to make sentences , using the structures . - Make sentences with the - Introduce the situation of the conversation then ask structures Ss to do exercise . - Listen to the teacher ..

(119) * Exercise : T or F predictions a. Liz’d like to send the letter to great Britain . b. She need some envelopes . c. They are 2,500 dong . d. The stamps for her letter cost 9,000 dong . e. The envelopes and the stamps are 11,500 dong . - Ask Ss to work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . 2.Practice : 18 min - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the predictions . - call on some Ss to give the answers , correct and give the correct answers : a. F b. T c. F d. F e. T - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions in the book . - Have Ss play a game : lucky numbers (1) Where is your nearest post office ? ( 2) LN (3) Where will Liz mail her letter to ? ( 4) How much is the letter to the USA ? (5) How much are these envelopes Liz needs ? (6) LN. (7) How much does Liz pay altogether ? (8) How much change does Liz have ? - Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks . III. Consolidation : 5 min -Ask Ss to write a passage using the questions given + Where is your nearest post office ? + How can you get there from your home ? + What can you buy there ? + How much is it to mail a letter in Viet nam ? + What else can you do at the post office ? - Go around class and provide help .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions - Look at the book and listen to the tape then correct the predictions . - Give the answers - Practice in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Look at the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . - Play a game in groups . - Answer the questions. - Write down .. - Write a passage . Ex: my nearest post office is about 500 meters from my house . I can get there by bike . there I can buy envelopes , postcards , stamps. A letter in VN costs 800 dong . I can make a phone call there , too ..

(120) - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the - Read the writing aloud . class . - Correct the mistake and remark . IV. Homework : 2 min - Learn by heart new words and structures by write 2 - Write homework . lines for each word and make 3 sentences for each structure . - Do exercise 1 at page 50 in workbook . - Prepare part 2,3 . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... WEEK 18 Ngày soạn: 15/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 21 /12/2015 UNIT 8 : PLACES Period 49 : B- At the post office (3,4,5,Remember) A .Objective By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listen for details to get further practice.

(121) in post office vocabulary and tell the price . - Practice listening skill . - Review : - Post office vocabulary . - Structures : How much is / are + S ? How much does / do + S + cost ? B. Teaching aids : Textbook ,tape , cassette , compurter and OHP. real things ( stamps, phone card , envelopes , writing pads…) C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . -Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks - Play a game : Networks. POST OFFICE. - Devide class into 2 groups . Ask them to dicuss then call 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board and write . - Remark and lead in the new lesson . II. New lesson : 1.Pre – listening : 15 min - Ask Ss to look at the things in the book , then call the names of these things . - Introduce the things Mrs Robinson will buy , and ask them to predict what Mrs Robinson will buy first , second … and predict how much she spend on each of these 5 items . - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions 2.While – listening : 15 min - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their predictions about the order . - Call on Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers + Envelopes . + A pen .. - 2 groups take part in the game . - Go to the board and write . - Look at the things and call the names . - Listen to the teacher and predict what Mrs Robinson will buy first , second …, - Predict how much she spend on each of these 5 items . - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . _ Listen to the tape and check the predictions . Give the answers ..

(122) + A writing pad . + Stamps . + A phone card . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the price . - Listen to the tape again and - Call on some Ss to give the answers . check the price . - Correct the mistake and give the answer key : - Give the answers . + Envelopes : 2,000 dong - Listen and write down . + A pen : 1,500 dong + A writing pad : 3,000 dong + Stamps : 500 dong + A phone card : 50, 000 dong Ask Ss to answer the question : What is the total cost ? How much change will Mrs Robinson have - Answer the questions . from 60,000 dong ? + The total cost is 59,000 - Ask Ss to write down the questions and dong answers in the notebooks . + She will have 1,000 dong 3.Post – listening : 7 min _ Write down . - Have Ss answer the questions in part 5 . - Make example : T : How much is it to mail a local letter in - Answer the questions . VN ? - listen carefully . S : It is 800 dong . - Ask them to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front - Work in pairs . of the class . - Practice asking and answering - Correct if necessary and ask them to write the in front of the class. questions and the answers in the notebooks . - Write down . III. Consolidation : 3 min - Remark : - Post office vocabulary . - listen and remember - Structures : How much is / are + S ? How much does / do + S + cost ? IV.Homework : 2 min - Write homework . - Do exercise 3 at page 52 in workbook . - Review unit 1 to 8 . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ Ngày soạn: 16/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 22/12/2015 Period 50 Review the first semester A.Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will apply them to do the test well ..

(123) Review :. - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . B. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk . C. Procedure : I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Chatting some questions with Ss . II.Consolidation and practice : 35 min A. The present progressive tense : - Ask Ss to give the form and use of the present progressive tense : 1. Form: ( + ) S + am / is / are + V-ing . ( - ) S + am / is / are + not + V- ing . ( ? ) Am / is / are + S + v- ing ? 2. Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at a time at present . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : now / at the moment / at present . Examples: She is listening to music at the moment . They are playing marbles in the yard now . - Have Ss make sentences as model . B. The simple future tense : - Have Ss give the form and the use in front of the class . * Form : ( + ) S + Will + V ( without To ) . ( - ) S + Will not + V ( without To ) ( ? ) Will + S + V ( without To ) ? 3. Use : It is used to express an action or a plan which will happen in the future . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : Tomorrow , Next week / month / year ….. Example: She will go to Ha noi tomorrow . They will have a party next week . - Ask Ss to make sentences . 1. Further practice : Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets . a. Tomorrow ( be ) ………..my birthday , so I would like you to come to my house for dinner tonight . b. You shouldn’t make noise when our teacher ( teach ) ……………….. c. The next Sunday will be Lan’s birthday so I ( buy ) ……..a gift for her tonight . d. Chi ( have ) …….a lot of English books . e. Minh never ( go ) ……..to the zoo by bike . f. Listen ! She ( play ) ………the piano . g. We usually ( play ) ………….Blindman’s bluff at recess. h. My father never ( drink ) …….coffee , but at the moment he (drink ) …….it i. I’d like ( buy ) ……some envelopes . j.The children enjoy ( read ) …………..picture books.

(124) -Ask ss to work individually.Then correct them on the board. C. Comparative : a) Short adjectives : - Have Ss give the form : S1 + Tobe + adj + er + than + S2 . EX: She is taller than me . This ruler is longer than that one . - Have Ss make sentences in front of the class . b) Long adjectives : _ Ask Ss to give the form : S1 + Tobe + more + adj + than + S2 . EX: This pen is more expensive than that one . He is more inteligent than his brother . 4. Especial cases : Good / well => better Bad / ill => Worse Many / much = > More Little => Less Far => Farther / further . Exercise 1: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . a. She doesn’t have as many toys as I . => She has ………….. b. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup . => There is ………… c. I don’t have so many friends as my sister . => I have ……………. d. My friends have more candies than I . => I don’t ……………… e. My brother drinks more coffee than my sister . => My sister drinks ……………. f. She eats more chocolate than I . => I eat ……………… g. She has less flour than he has . => He has …………………. h. There are more students in my class than there are in her class . => There are …………… i. There is less water in a dessert than there is in a mountain . => There isn’t …………………. j. There are fewer singers in a small city than there are in a big city . => There aren’t …………………………… - Ask ss to work in 4 groups. Then give the correct answers. - Remark and correct them. Exercise3: Complete the sentences. Use the correct form of the adjective in brackets 1. fruit is ______ candy. (good) 2. cars are ________ bicycles. (fast).

(125) 3. houses in the city are _________ house in the country. (expensive) 4. winter is _________ summer. (cold) 5. dogs are _______ cats. (friendly) 6. Ho Chi Minh city is ________ Da Nang. (big) 7. Most buildings in Hue are _______ buildings in Ha Noi. (Short) 8. The USA is _______ England. (Large) III. Consolidation : 3 min Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . IV. Homework : 2 min - Do exercises in the notebooks . - Review for doing the first semester test . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ Ngày soạn: 17/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 23/12/2015 Period 51 Review the first semester. A.Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will apply them to do the test well . - Asking and answering about distance and personal information - Exclamation . - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . B. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk . C. Procedure : I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Chatting some questions with Ss . II.Consolidation and practice : 35 min A.Asking answering about distances and personal information: - Ask Ss to give the structure about asking and answering the distances : How far is it from……….to…………..? It’s about …………….km/m EX: How far is it from your house to school ? It’s about 2 km . How far is it from NamDinh to Ha Noi ? It’s about 90 km . - Have Ss work in pairs ask and answer about distances and personal information. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . *Exercise1: Choose the best answer 1. ______ is your family name, Hoa? a. Who b. What c. How.

(126) 2. ______ do you live? – on Tran Hung Dao street a. What b. Where c.How 3. ______ far is it from your house to your school? a. How b. What c.Where 4. ______ do you go to school? – by bike. a. What b. where c.How 5. ______ is your age? a. How b. What c.When 6. ______ class is she in? a. How b. Where c.How 7. _____ is speaking? a. Who b. What c.How 8. ______ is the girl talking to Mrs Lien? a. Who b. What c.How *Exercise2: Write the answers to the questions about yourself a. What is your name? ………… b. How old are you? ……… c. Where do you live? ……… d. How far is it from your house to school?…………… e. How do you go to school? …………….…… f. Who do you live with? ……………… g. When is your birthday? ………………….…… B/Exclamations : What + a / an + ( adj ) + N ! What + ( adj ) + Ns ! EX : What a nice picture ! What a cold day! What naughty boys ! - Have Ss make sentences . *Exercise1: Write exclamatory sentence 1. What is a very comfortable room. What …………..! 2. There are modern computers. What ………..! 3. She is an intelligent girl. What ……………..! 4. That student is excellent. - What …………….! C.Asking and answering about the price : How much + is / are + S ? => S + is / are + ………. How much + does / do + S + cost ? => It/ They + costs / cost + …….. Ex : How much does this shirt cost ? => It costs 50,000 dong . How much are these envelopes ? => They are 2,000 dong . D.Making suggestions : - Let’s + V . - Should we + V ? - How about + V-ing ? - What about + V-ing ? - Why don’t we + V ?  Agreement : OK / I’d love to /That’s a good idea .  Disagreement : + I’m sorry , I can’t . + I’m sorry , I can’t . I’m busy ..

(127) + I’d love to but I’m going to……… + Thanks anyway . EX : Let’s go to Lan’ house . Should we play table tennis ? What about going to the movies ? Why don’t we go to the beach ? 1. Rewrite sentences, keeping the same meaning to original ones 1. What about going to the movie theater ? Why don’t you ………………………? 2. Lan has more books than her brother. Lan’ s brother has ……………. 3. My sister drinks more milk than I. I drink ……………….. 4. Where do you live ? What …………………? ’ 5. Let s play volleyball. What about……………? 6. How about going to the movies tonight? Would you like …………………? 2. Number the dialogue in order: _____ A. At 6 o’clock in the evening. _____ B. I’m not sure. I will call on Monday. _____ C. It’s my birthday next Saturday. Would you like to come to my birthday party? _____ D. OK. See you then. _____ E. I’ll see you next Saturday. After the party we’re going to see a movie. Will you join us? _____ F. Yes, I’d love to. But what time? _____ G. I’ll come to your house at that time. III. Consolidation : 3 min Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . IV. Homework : 2 min - Do exercises in the notebooks . - Review for doing the first semester test . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 23/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 28 /12/2015 Period 52 : Revision A.Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt.

(128) from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will apply them to do the test well . Review : - Invitation - Asking the way -Buying things B. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk . C. Procedure : I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Chatting some questions with Ss . II.Consolidation and practice : 35 min A.Invitation Would you like + N ? Would you like + to V ? EX : Would you like to go to the concert with me ? Would you like to come to my house for lunch ?  Yes , I’d love to / Yes , please / All right .  No, thanks / I’d love to but I’m busy . B. Asking the way : - Is there ……near here ? / Where is …….? - Could you tell me how to get there ? - Could you show me the way to the ……..? - How can I get there ?  Go straight ahead / go long this street . Take the first / second street on the left / right ./ Turn right / left . EX : Could you show me the way to the post office ?  Go straight ahead , Take the first street on the right . It is opposite the police station . C.Buying things : I’d like + N Can I have a/ some + N , please ? I need to buy an English book , please ? Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets . j. Tomorrow ( be ) ………..my birthday , so I would like you to come to my house for dinner tonight . k. You shouldn’t make noise when our teacher ( teach ) ……….. l. The next Sunday will be Lan’s birthday so I ( buy ) ………..a gift for her tonight . m. Chi ( have ) ………….a lot of English books . n. Minh never ( go ) ………..to the zoo by bike . o. Listen ! She ( play ) …………the piano . p. We usually ( play ) ……….Blindman’s bluff at recess. q. My father never ( drink ) ……….coffee , but at the moment he ( drink ) …….it.

(129) r. I’d like ( buy ) ……………some envelopes . s. The children enjoy ( read ) ……………..picture books . Exercise 2: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . k. She doesn’t have as many toys as I .=> She………………………... l. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup . => There ……... m. I don’t have so many friends as my sister . => I have…………………….. n. My friends have more candies than I .=> I don’t …………………….. My brother drinks more coffee than my sister .=> My sister drinks…………... o. She eats more chocolate than I . => I eat ……………. p.She has less flour than he has .=> He has ………………….. Exercise 3 : Choose the best answer . 1. Hurry or you’ll be late ………school . A. with B. for C. at 2. My homework …………about two hours each day . A. takes B. has C. gives 3. Our summer vacation starts in june . It ……….almost two months . A. happens B. takes C. lasts 4. What do you do………….the vacation ? A. during B. while C. when 5. We have fun ……………together on the farm . A. working B. work C. to work 6. We don’t have classes on Saturday , but we work one hour ………..each day . A. more B. much C. many 7. Viet namese students have …………vacations than American ones . A. few B. fewest C. fewer 8. Many women work …….home . A. at B. in C. on 9. They take ……..of the house and look after the children . A. care B. homework C. notice 10.My brother always goes to bed early , but he …………..gets up early . A. not B. never C. ever Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the adj/ adv in parentheses . 1. This house isn’t very modern . I want a ( modern) …….one . 2. That building is the ( high ) ………..one in our town . 3. Nam is a good tennis player . I think he is the ( good ) ………in the club . 4. My bag isn’t very heavy . Your bag is ( heavy ) ……….. 5. We don’t know many people . You know ( many )………..people than us . 6. It is a very bad film . It’s the ( bad ) ………….film I’ve ever seen . 7. What is the ( long )……….river in the world ? 8. Tuan doesn’t work hard . I work ( hard )…………………… 9. She doesn’t know much . Her sister knows much ( much )…………. 10.They have little freetime but we have ( little )………………………..

(130) III.Consolidation : 3 min Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . IV.Homework : 2 min - Do exercises in the notebooks . - Review for doing the first semester test . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ Ngày soạn: 24/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 29 /12/2015 Period 53 : Revision A.Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will review the knowledge which they have learnt from unit 1 to unit 8 . From that they will apply them to do the test well . B. Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , chalk . C. Procedure : - Teacher guides students to do some kinds of exercises I Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently. 1. a. hours b. keeps c. students d. weeks 2. a. banana b. favorite c. famous d. grade 3. a. armchair b. kitchen c. catch d. chemistry 4. a. see b. city c. fine d. live 5 a.chess b.teacher c.lunch d.school 1- a 2- a 3-d 4-c 5-d II. Choose the best answer 1. My brother is good…………..English. A. at B. in C. with 2. ……………go to the park. A. Why don’t we B. What about C. Let’s 3. All the students enjoy…………….on the weekend. A. to camp B. camping C. camp 4. Nam often……………….in the afternoon. A. go swimming B. goes swimming C. swimming 5. Does Lan often play blind man’s bluff……….recess ? A. on B. in C.at 6. Will she be free tomorrow evening? A.No, she won’t B. Yes, I will C. yes, she does. 7. Mr Tuan has…………..days off than Mr John. A. fewer B. many C. less 8. The newspapers are…………. the shelf. A. on B. in C. at 1- A 2- C 3- B 4- B 5- C 6-A 7- A 8-A III. Make question for the underlined words. 1. I always go to school..

(131) …………………………………………………………………………………. 2. How much / this letter/ cost? …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. It’s 3 kilometers from my house to the bank. …………………………………………………………………………………. 4. could/ show/ me / how/ get/ Ha Noi/ please? ………………………………………………………………………………… 5. A phone card is 50.000 VND. ………………………………………………………………………………….  Key : 1. How often do you go to school ? 2. How much does this letter cost ? 3. How far is it from your house to the bank ? 4. Could you show me how to get to Ha Noi , please ? 5.How much is a phone card? IV. Read the passage. Then answer the questions . My name is Lan. I am 13 years old. I am a student at LeLoi school. My father is a farmer. He grows vegetables and raises cattle on our farm in the countryside. My mother is a teacher. She is always busy at school. I have an elder sister – Mai. She is a nurse, and she works in a hospital. I love my family very much. Questions: 1. How old is Lan ? 2.Is Lan’s father an engineer ? 3. Where does he grow vegetables ? 4. What does Lan’s mother do ? *key: 1- She is a student 2- No, he is 3- He grows vegetables on his farm in the countryside. 4- She is a nurse. III.Consolidation : 3 min Remark the way how to do some kinds of exercises IV.Homework : 2 min - Do exercises in the notebooks . - Review for doing the first semester test . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ Ngày soạn: 24/12/2015 Ngày dạy: 30/12/2015 Week 19.

(132) Period 54 :The first semester test A.The objectives : The students will apply the knowledge they have learn to do the test , through the test the teacher will know the knowledge of each student . B.Test : Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng TN TL TN TL TN TL I. 2 2 4 Pronunciation 0,25 0,25 1,0 II. Language 8 6 14 focus 0,25 0,25 3,5 III. Reading. 2 0,5. 2 0,5. IV. Writing. 3. 4 0,5. Tổng. 12. 11. 4 2,0 7. 0,5 6. 3,5 29 10. Question 1: Choose one word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.(1p). 1. A. close B. stove C. moment D. sometimes 2. A. hour B. hat C. house D. here 3. A. better B. wet C. become D. set 4. A. teacher B. seat C. bean D. weather Question 2. Complete each of the sentences using the most suitable option (A, B, C or D). (2. ps) 1. The clothing store is ________ Hai Ba Trung Street. A. between B. on C. at D. under 2. Hoa ________ her neighbor making her dress now. A. to watch B. watches C. is watching D. watched 3. ________ a clever woman! A. What B. How C. Who D. When 4. How ________ do you write to each other? A. sometimes B. usually C. often D. always 5. Tim’s father has ________ days off than his mother. A. fewer B fewest C. few D. some 6. ________ go fishing? A. Should B. Let’s C. When D. Why 7. What sports does Hoa like ________ ? A. playing B. played C. play D. plays 8. What do you usually ________ after school? A. doing B. does C. do D. did Question 3 : Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verbs .(1,5ps) 1. I’d like ( buy ) ……………….some stamps for overseasmail ..

(133) 2. 3. 4. 5.. We ( rehearse ) ……………………..a play at the moment . Where they ( spend ) …………………………..their summer vacation next year ? Students in the USA usually ( not wear ) ……………………..uniform. My brother ( go ) …………………to the youth club every weekend . He enjoys ( play ) …………………..sports very much . Question 4 : Read the following passage then answer questions (2,0ps) My uncle, Mr. Nam, is a hardworking farmer. He usually starts his work at five in the morning. He feeds the cattle and collects eggs. Then he has breakfast with his family. From 8 in the morning till 4 in the afternoon he works in the field with his nineteen-year-old son. They grow some rice but their main crop is vegetables. They grow different kinds of vegetables. They can earn some money by selling vegetables. They work very hard during the daytime, and in the evening uncle Nam and his wife often go to their neighbors for a drink or a chat. After a hard day in the field, they are tired but happy. They love their field and village very much. 1. What does Mr. Nam do? ................................................................ 2. Where does he work? ................................................................................. 3. How old is his son? ................................................................................. 4. Are they happy with their life? ............................................................................. Question 5: Rewrite these sentences without changing their meanings (1,5p) 1. How much is this dictionary ? => How much does ………………? 2. Why don’t we go to the zoo? => What about ....................................? 3. My friends have more cadies than I . => I have ………………………………………………………………………. Question 5 : Complete the sentences , using the words given (2ps) 1. Could / tell / how / get / police station / please ? ……………………………………………………………………………………. 2. How much / cost / mail / letter / USA ? ………………………………………………………………………………… 3. How / father / always / travel / work / everyday ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 4. My mother / watch / T.V / the room / moment . …………………………………………………………………………………. C.Homework : Prepare unit 9 – A1. The second semester === &=== Unit 9: At home and away. (5 Lessons).

(134) I.Objectives - After finishing the unit Ss will be able to: - Retell the things that happned in the past - Have more love to landcapes of our country and how to live with their neighbors. 1. Knowledge *Vocabulary Aquarium, shark, dolphin, turtle, colorful, exit, cap, crab, instead, unfortunately, peanuts, keep in touch, improve, arrive, rent, move, neighbor, material, hairdresser, dressmaker * Structures Past simple tense Exclamative sentence II.Teaching methods - Comunitive, some adroitnesses, realia, substitution table III.Teaching aids - Textbook , poster of Nha Trang , tape , cassette, computer and OHP . IV. Anticipated problem: Past simple V.Procedures From period 55th 59th Lesson 1:A1 Lesson 2:A2,3 Lesson 3:A4,5,Remember Lesson 4:B1,2 Lesson 5:B3,4,Remember Ngày soạn: 05/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 11/01/2016 Week 20 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Period 55 : Lesson 1 : A holiday in Nha Trang ( A1 ) A. Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be used to the past simple tense . They will know about some of the irregular verbs and regular verbs . 1. Vocabulary : - Aquarium ( n ) - Gift ( n ) - Delicious ( adj ) - To be : was / were - To have => had - To buy => bought - To take => took - To go => went - To talk => talked - To return => returned - To visit => visited 2. Grammar : - The past simple tense . B.Teaching aids :.

(135) Textbook , poster of Nha Trang , tape , cassette, computer and OHP . C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ? - Remark and lead in the new lesson . II.New lesson: 1.Presentation : 20min - Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book , then introduce the situation of the lesson . - Explain some new words to Ss : + Aquarium ( n ) : + Gift ( n ) : + Delicious ( adj ) : + To be : was / were ( past ) + To have : had ( past ) + To take : took ( past ) + To go : went ( past ) + To buy : bought ( past ) + To talk : talked ( past ) + To return : returned ( past ) + To visit : visited ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. * Checking technique : matching - Ask Ss to match the words with their meanings . Gift Mua Aquarium Ngon Took Mãn quµ Bought Cã Delicious Trë vÒ Went Hå c¸. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer the questions .. -Look at the picture and listen carefully . - Listen and write down . Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually. - Do exercise : matching. - One student goes to the board and match ..

(136) Had cÇm Returned §i - Remark and give mark . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : - What places did Robinsons visit and what did they do there ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and repeat after the tape . - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce quickly the past simple tense , then ask Ss to find out the sentences in the past . - Ask them to read after the teacher these sentences and verbs . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and number the sentences . - Ask them to exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class . - Remark and give the correct answer : 1. Liz went to Nha Trang . 2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen aquarium . 3. Liz bought souvenirs . 4. Liz returned to Ha noi . 5. Liz talked to Ba about her vacation . 2. Practice : 15 min - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice asking and answering . + Vacation / wonderful + Food / delicious + Things / expensive + People / friendly + Nha Trang / beautiful - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class .. -Look at the book and listen to the tape .. - Listen to the tape and read after the tape . - Give the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Listen carefully and find out the sentences in the past . - Read after the teacher . - Read the dialogue again and number the sentences . - Exchange the result . - Give the answer in front of the class . - Write down in the notebooks. - Practice asking and answering in pairs .. - Practice in front of the class ..

(137) - EX: How was the vacation ? It was wonderful . III.Consolidation: 3 min - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game. - Play game : EX: S1: Last vacation I was in ……… IV.Homework :2 min S2: Were you in …………? - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines S1: Yes, I was / No, I wasn’t for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 53 in workbook . - Write homework . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 05/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 12/01/2016 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Period 56 : Lesson 2 : A holiday in Nha Trang ( A2, A3 ) A. Objectives: - Students read the passage for details about the Robinsons’ vacation and practice Whquestions in the past simple tense . - The students will continue to learn about the past simple tense and know some more regular and irregular verbs . They continue practicing listening skill. 1. Vocabulary : - Shark ( n ) - Crab ( n ) - Dolphin ( n ) - Cap ( n ) - Turtle ( n ) - Exit ( n ) - To eat => ate - To see => Saw - To think => thought - To wear => wore 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP . C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up :3 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Palmanism : - Play a game in 2 groups . Go , have , went , talk , bought , had , take , took , talked . - Remark . II. New lesson . A2:.

(138) 1.Pre- reading : 7 min -Introduce the lesson : In the last period , we heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha trang with her family . In today’s lesson , we will read the text about one of the most interesting and memorable activities which Liz and her family did during the vacation – the visit to Tri Nguyen aquarium . - Explain some new words to Ss. + Shark ( n ): + Dolphin ( n ) : + Turtle ( n ) : + Crab ( n ) : + Cap ( n ) : + Exit ( n ) : + To eat => ate ( past ) + To see => saw ( past ) + To wear => wore ( past ) + To think => thought ( past ) * Checking technique : What and where * Matching : Eat wore See thought Wear ate think saw - Remark . * Before reading the text , ask Ss to do exercise : T or F prediction . a. The Robinsons went to TN aquarium . b. They saw many different types of fish . c. Liz bought a little turtle . d. They had lunch at a food stall. e. Liz ate fish and crab . - Ask Ss to discuss in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions. 2.While - reading :10 min - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their predictions . - Call some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : a. T b. T c. F d. T e. F - Have Ss read the text in front of the class .. - Listen carefully .. - Listen and write down .. - Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .. - Play a game : what and where -One student goes to the board and match .. - Listen then do exercise .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions .. - Look at the book and listen to the tape and check the prediction ..

(139) - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the text again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a. Liz’s parents went to the aquarium with her. b. They saw many different types of fish …. c. They bought a cap in the souvenir shop . d. Yes, she did . She wore the cap all day . e. Yes, they do . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate fish and crab . f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium . 3.Post – reading : 5 min - Ask Ss to tell the story of Liz’s trip to TN aquarium , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and tell the story , using the pictures . - Remark and give marks . A3: 1. Pre – listening : 5 min - Introduce the situation of the listening , then ask Ss to read 5 pairs of sentences in the book . - Explain some new words to Ss . + Unfortunately ( adv ) >< Fortunately ( adv ) + Peaceful ( adj ) : + Calm ( adj ) : + Roadside restaurant ( n ) : + Peanuts ( n ) : + To drive => drove ( past ) *Checking technique : Rub out and remember .. - Read the text in front of the class. - Read the text again and find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Write down in the notebooks .. - Look at the pictures and retell the story . - Some Ss go to the board and tell the story .. - Listen to the teacher carefully and read the sentences . - Listen and write down . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down .. - Play a game : rub out and remember . - Ask Ss to read the sentences again and guess - Read the sentences then guess which sentences they are going to hear . . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . - Give the predictions . 2. While - listening :7 min - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their - Listen to the tape and check prediction .( 2 times ) the predictions ..

(140) - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Give the answers . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the - Listen to the tape again and answers. check the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . - Listen and copy down . b, d , e , h , j Exercise : Complete the passage . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and complete the - Listen to the tape and passage . complete the passage . Liz was excited as the bus …1……..through the countryside . Everything …..2……. calm and peaceful. At 4 o’clock the bus …3…… at a small roadside restaurant . Mrs Robinson …..4…… some peanuts and an ice cream for Liz . The bus …5 . …. in Ha noi at about 7 p.m . - Call some Ss to give the results which they have - Give the answers . heard . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Copy down . 1. drove 2. looked 3. stopped 4. bought 5. arrived 3.Post - listening :3 min - Have Ss work in pairs interviewing Liz about - Work in pairs . her family’s trip back to Hanoi . EX: + How did you travel back to Hanoi ? +What did you see on the way back ? +How did everything look ? +Were you tired ? +When did you arrive in Hanoi? - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the - Practice in front of the class . class . - Remark . III. Consolidation: 3 min - Remark the past simple tense - listen and remember. IV.Homework : 2 min - Write a passage about Liz’s family’s trip back to - Write homework . Hanoi ( 8 to 10 sentences ) - Do exercise 3 at page 54 in workbook . - Prepare part 4 ,5 . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ Ngày soạn: 06/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 13/01/2016 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Period 57: Lesson 4 :A holiday in Nha Trang.

(141) ( A4,5+ remember ) A.Objective : - The Students will read Ba’s diary to understand the details and talk about past activities - Students cotinue to practice reading skill. 1. Vocabulary : - To keep in touch - To teach => taught - To rent => rented - To improve => improved - To move => moved 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures, computer and OHP . C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks Regular verbs. Looked. Irregular verbs. Students’Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : Networks. 2 teams take part in the game .. bought. - Devide the class into 2 teams - Remark . II.New lesson : 1.Read Ba’s diary : 30 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words : + To keep in touch ( v ) : + To rent ( v ) => rented ( past ) + To move ( v ) => moved ( past ) + To teach ( v ) => taught ( past ) + to improve ( v ) => improved ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually .. - Students go to the board and write .. - Listen to the teacher and write down .. Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down ..

(142) - Correct their pronunciation . *Exercise : T or F prediction 1) The Robinsons are American . 2) Mr Robinson works at a hospital in Hanoi . 3) They rented a house next door to Ba’s . 4) They moved to a new apartment last week . 5) Liz and Ba are the same age . - Ask Ss to work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to read Ba’s diary then check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1.T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T - Call on some Ss to read the diary aloud . - Ask Ss to read the sentences from a to g , then read the diary again in order to correct the false sentences . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partner . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the true sentences . - Correct and give the correct answers . a) Liz lived next door to Ba . b) Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet nam . c) Ba collects stamps. d) Liz’s aunt lives in New York . e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of hanoi f) The Robinsons moved . Now Ba is sad / unhappy . g) Ba will see Liz next week . 2.Play with words : 5min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and say about these activities . - Ask them to look at the book and listen to the tape . - Have Ss read after the tape . - Call on some Ss to read aloud . III.Consolidation :3 min - Ask Ss to imagine Liz is their new friend . Write a letter to one of their friends to tell him or her. - Do exercise in groups . - Give the predictions . - Read the diary and check the predictions . - Give the answers .. - Read the diary aloud . - Correct the false sentences . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Go to the board and write . - Copy down .. -Look at the pictures and say about them . - Listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Read aloud . - Write a letter to a friend about Liz and her family ..

(143) about Liz and her family . EX: Dear………, I’m glad to tell you that I have a new friend . Her name is Liz . She is American . ………. -Read the letter in front of - call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the the class . class . - Remark . IV.Homework :2 min - Write homework . - Write again the letter in the exercise book . - Do exercise 4 at page 54 in workbook . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... WEEK 21 Ngày soạn: 16/1/2016.

(144) Ngày dạy: 20/1/2016 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Period 58 : Lesson 4 : B- Neighbors ( B1,2 ) A. Objective : After the lesson , the students will practice the past simple tense in negative and interrogative forms and short answers to talk about past activities . 1.Vocabulary : - Hairdresser - Neighbor - Dressmaker - Material -To make => made - To cut => cut 2.Grammar : The past simple tense in negative and interrogative . B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette ,computer, OHP, picture . C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Pelma nism - Play a game : Pelmanism come , improve , wore , came , received , improved , receive , wear , teach , taught . - Demonstrate the group which is winner II.New lesson : A. Listen . then practice with a partner : 23 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess what - Look at the picture and guess they are doing . - Introduce : Lan and Hoa are friends . they are - Listen to the teacher . talking . Now you listen to the tape and tell me what they are talking about . - Play the tape for Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss : - Listen to the tape . + Hairdresser ( n ): - Listen and write down . + Dressmaker ( n ) : + Neighbor ( n ) : + Material ( n ) : - Guess meanings , read new + To make ( v ) => made words in chorus and + To cut ( v ) => cut individually , then copy down . - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . * Checking technique : Rub out and remember . - Play a game : Rub out and remember ..

(145) - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again then answer the question . - Correct and give the correct answer : They are talking about Hoa’s hair , dress . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a) She is a hairdresser . b) She is a dressmaker . 4. Answer : 10 min - Introduce the form of short answers . - Make model sentences : + Did Hoa buy the dress ? No, she didn’t . + Did her aunt cut her hair ? Yes , she did . - Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the information in the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . III.Consolidation :5 min - Repeat the form of short answer of the past simple tense . - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game . EX: Yesterday I went to a ……and I bought a/ an ….. + Did you go to ………..? + Did you buy ………….? - Remark . IV.Homework : 2 min - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them .. - Listen to the tape again , then answer the question .. - Read after the tape . - Work in pairs . -Practice in front of the class. - Read the dialogue again and find out the answers . - Work in pairs . -Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Copy down .. - Listen . - Listen and write down .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Listen to the teacher . - Play a game : Guessing game Write the sentences in a paper sheet .. - Write homework ..

(146) - Do exercises 1,2 at page 55, 56 in workbook . - Prepare part 3,4 . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 16/1/2016 Ngày dạy: 21/1/2016 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Period 59 : Lesson 5 : B – Neighbors ( B3,4+ remember ) A. Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will read the text for details to understand Hoa’s sewing work and further practice in WH- questions to talk about past activities . Practice reading and writing skills . 1.Vocabulary : - Hobby - To sew - Sewing machine - To decide => decided - Cushion - To try => tried - Useful - To fit => fitted 2.Grammar : The simple past tense . Wh – questions to talk about past activities . B. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , computer,OHP , picture . C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions : - Answer the questions . + What did you do last night ? + Did you watch TV ? + Did you do your homework ? + What time did you go to bed ? ……………. - Remark . II.New lesson : A. Read . Then answer : 25 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then - Listen then write down . explain some new words : + Hobby ( n ) : + Sewing machine ( n ) : - Guess the meaning , read new + Cushion ( n ) : words in chorus and individually ,.

(147) -. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) B. -. + Useful ( adj ) : + To sew ( v ) : + To decide ( v ) => decided ( past ) + To try (v ) => tried ( past ) + To fit ( v ) => fitted ( past ) Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . Correct their pronunciation . 5. Checking technique : What and where . 6. Exercise : T or F prediction . Hoa decided to learn how to sew . She didn’t buy some material. She made a cushion for her armchair . Next, She made a shirt . It was blue with white flowers on it . Have Ss do exercise in groups Call on some groups to give their predictions Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . Call on some Ss to give the results . Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . Have Ss work in pairs . Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . Correct and give the correct answers She learned how to use a sewing machine . She made a cushion for her armchair first . It was blue and white . Next , she made a skirt . It was green with white flowers on it . It looked very pretty . She tried it on but it didn’t fit . Hoa’s neighbor helped her . Finally, It fitted very well. Write . Put the verbs in brackets in the simple past tense : 10 min Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss. then copy down .. - Play a game : what and where .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the predictions . - Give the results .. - Read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again and find out the answers - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Copy down ..

(148) - Ask Ss to read the sentences . - Ask them to complete the sentences with the form of the verbs in the past simple tense . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down . - Correct and give the correct answer : Watched - bought - cut - used - decided - was made -was - wasn’t - helped - fitted III..Consolidation: 3 min - Repeat the form of Wh- questions : Wh- + did + S + Verb….? EX: Where did you buy this shirt ? I bought it in the shop . What did you do last night ? I watched TV . - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering using Wh – questions . - Remark . IV.Homework :2 min - Learn by heart part remember by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 56,57 in workbook - Prepare language focus .. - Listen to the teacher . - Read the sentences in the book . - Complete the sentences .. - Exchange the results with the partner. - Go to the board and write down . - Copy down .. - Listen to the teacher carefully .. - Work in pairs asking answering using wh- questions to talk about past activities .. - Write homework . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 17/1/2016 Ngày dạy: 22/1/2016 Period 60 : LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 A. Objective : By the end of the lesson , Ss will practice the past simple tense , prepositions of places , “ How much “ “ How far “ to talk about the price and distance , comparatives with more , less and fewer . - The past simple tense . - How much is it ? - Prepositions of places . - Comparatives . B. Teaching aids :.

(149) Textbook , , tape , computer,OHP C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions about what they did lastweek . EX : What did you do last weekend ? Did you go to the library ? Did you visit you grandparents ? …………. II. practice :35 min A. How much is it ? a) Work with a partner . Read the dialogue . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Ask ss to repeat the structure to ask and answer about the price . -. Ex : How much is the green dress? = How much does the green dress cost ? b) Now make similar dialogues . - Ask Ss to use the information in the table to make similar dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake .. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer the questions .. - Read the dialogue in pairs. - Give the structure asking answering the price : + How much is/ are + S ?  It/ They + is / are +…. + How much + do / does + S + cost ? => It costs / They cost …... - Make similar dialogues .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. S1: How much is the blue hat ? S2: It’s 15,000dong . S1: What about the yellow hat ? 2) Prepositions : S2: It’s 12,000 dong . - Have Ss give the prepositions of places . - Give the prepositions of places. - Ask Ss to look at the map . Write the location - Write the location of each store of each store . EX: The clothing store is on Hai Ba Trung street It’s near the shoe store to the right . - Call some Ss to say about the location of the - Read the location of the stores. stores. + The bookstore is on Hue street. It’s between the restaurant and.

(150) the minimart . - Remark . ………. - Call one student to give the structure of - Give the structure of asking and asking and answering the distance . answering the distance .: How far is it from……to…….? It’s about …….. - Ask Ss to use the information in the table to work in pairs : one asks and one answers - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Practice in front of the class. S1: How far is it from the shoe store to the minimart ? S2: It’s 500 meters . S1: How far is it from the clothing store to the bookstore ? S2: It’s 450 meters . 3) Past simple tense : ………………. a) Write the past form of the verbs . -Ask Ss to write the past form of the verbs . - Call on one student to go to the board and - Write past form of the verbs . write down . - Correct and give the correct answer : - Write on the board . + Buy => bought - Write in the notebook . + help => helped + Remember => remembered + take => took + send => sent think => thought talk => talked b) Complete the sentences . Use the words in the box . - Ask Ss to use the words in the box to complete the sentences . - Complete the sentences with - Call on some Ss to do exercise . the given words . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Do exercise in front of the 1) Played class. 2) Talked 3) bought 4) Worked 5) Sent.

(151) - Ask Ss to write down . 4) Simple tenses : - Have Ss to look at Nga’s diary then complete the dialogue . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of theclass . - Correct the mistake and give the key : Nga: Everyday I clean my room , help my mom and study English . Minh : What did you do yesterday ? Nga : I cleaned my room, helped my mom, studied E , watched TV , played volleyball and stayed at Hoa’s house. Minh: How about tomorrow? Nga : I’ll study E, clean my room, help my mom, see a movie, visit my grandmother and buy new shoes . 5)More , less , fewer . - Ask Ss to repeat the use of more , less and fewer . - Ask Ss to look at the two refregerators and write sentences , using more , less and fewer . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down . - Correct and give the correct answers : + Before there were more bananas , Now there are fewer bananas . + Before there was more milk . Now there was less milk . III.Consolidation :3 min - Repeat the structures which Ss have learnt IV.Homework : 2 min - do test yourself in workbook. - Prepare part A1- unit 10. - Write down . - Complete the dialogue. - Work in pairs . - Role play in front of the class .. - Repeat the use of more, less and fewer . - Look at two refregeratos and write sentences . - Go to the board and write down - Copy down .. - Listen to the teacher .. - Write homework . * Comments: ................................................................................................................ ..... ................................................................................. ................................................ .......................................................................................................................................

(152) UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE I .Aims: After finishing the unit Ss will be able to - After finishing the unit Ss will be able to + Talk about habits, routines and a diary entry. + Talk about a visit to the dentist. + Talk about hygiene + Have aware of hygiene to protect their health 1. Knowledge *Vocabulary - appointment, cavity, comb, dentist, drill, fill, harvest, helpful, hygiene, iron, scared, sensible, surgery, tidy, touch *Structures - Present simple tense, Past simple tense, Frequency, - Why- Because 2. Skills: Listening , speaking, reading, writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about habits, routines ,a diary and personal hygiene . They can tell about their toothache and a visit to the dentist + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen and arrange the pictures in to the correct order, listen and answer the questions. + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read a letter or a diary and answer the questions + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write a letter , a diary and sentences that use the present simple and past simple. II.Teaching methods - Communicative, substitutions,Eliciting , pair work , group work or work individually. III.Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture about the heath IV. Anticipated problem: Help students to have aware of hygiene to protect their health V. Procedures - From period 61st to 65th -Lesson 1:A1+ A2 -Lesson 2:A3+A4+Remember -Lesson 3:B1 -Lesson 4:B2+B3 -Lesson 5:B4+B5+B6+Remember.

(153) Ngày soạn: 18/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 25/01/2016 WEEK 22 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Period 61 : Lesson 1: A- Personal hygiene ( A1+A2 ) A. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will read a letter to understand the details about Hoa and her family . - The students continue to practice about personal hygiene through the listening. 1.Vocabulary : - Harvest - To take morning exercises - Helpful - To iron - To hope - Probably 2.Grammar : - The simple present tense - The simple past tense . B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture about the heath C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Brainstorming : Likes….. Class…. Work in groups .. HOA From…. Lives with…... Live in…... - Ask Ss to discuss about Hoa in groups . - Demonstrate the discussion . - Call on 2 groups to demonstrate their discussion in front of the class . - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson : 1.A1: Read. Then answer the question :18 min - Introduce the lesson then explain some new -Listen and write down . words : + Harvest ( n ): + Helpful ( adj ) :.

(154) a. b. c. d. e. f. -. + To take morning exercises : + To hope ( v ): + To iron ( v ): + Probably ( adv ) : Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . Correct their pronunciation . Have Ss play a game : what and where in order to check new words . Ask Ss to order the sentences of Hoa’s mom’s letter . Your dad and I hope you’re fine . I hope you’re taking care of yourself . I received a letter from your aunt last week . I miss you a lot . Don’t forget to write . Your grand father talks about you a lot . Call some Ss to give their predictions . Ask Ss to look at the letter and listen to the tape , then check their predictions .. - Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually the copy down in the notebook .. - Play a game . - Order the sentences .. - Give their predictions . - Look at the book and listen to the tape , then check the predictions . - Give the answers .. - Call some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1- a 2- f 3- c 4- b 5- d 6- e - Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the _ Read the letter aloud . class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the letter again then find out the - Read the letter again to find answers for the questions in the book . out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Work in pairs . * Have Ss play a game called lucky numbers : - Play a game : lucky numbers 1) Who helps Hoa’s parents on the farm ? ( Answer the questions ) 2) LN 3) What does Hoa’s mother want her to do? 4) Why are Hoa’s parents busy ? 5) LN 6) What does Hoa’s mother want her not to do ? 7) How is Hoa different now ? 8) When will they go to Hanoi ? - Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the - Write the answers in the.

(155) notebooks . 2.A2 : Listen : 15 min * Pre- listening : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures then introduce the aim of the lesson to Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss . + To polish ( v ) : + To change ( v ): + To comb ( v ) : + Pants ( n ) : + Sandals ( n ) : + To drink ( v ) => drank ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Ask Ss to predict the order of the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . * While- listening : - Play the tape for Ss and ask them to check their predictions . ( 2 times ) - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and check . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. a 2.e 3. f 4. d 5. g 6. c 7. h 8. b *Post – listening : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday . EX: Yesterday , Hoa got up, she took a shower and put on her clothes ………. - Call on some Ss to tell what Hoa did yesterday in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . III.Consolidation: 5 min - Ask Ss to imagine they are Hoa . Write a letter to her mother . - Go around the class and provide the help - Have Ss exchange the letter with their partners . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Correct the common mistakes . - Remark .. notebooks .. - Look at the pictures carefully and listen to the teacher .. - Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and imdividually then copy down . - Predict the order of the pictures . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the predictions . - Give the answers . - Listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Copy down . - Look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday .. - Some Ss tell about Hoa in front of the class .. - Write a letter to Hoa’s mother . - Exchange the letter with the partner . - Read the letters in front of the class ..

(156) IV.Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Rewrite the letter in the exercise book . - Do exercise 1 at page 61 in workbook . - Prepare part 2. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 19/1/2016 Ngày dạy: 26/1/2016 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Period 62 : Lesson 2: A- Personal hygiene ( A3,A4,REmember ) A. Objectives : - By the end of the lesson , The students practice reading the diary and writing a letter to reply and talk about the routine and hygiene . - Practice reading and writing skill . 1.Vocabulary : - To polish - To comb - To change - Sandals - Pants - To drink => drank 2.Grammar Review the past simple tense B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture about the heath C.Procedures : T’s Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare . D I D B N. Z K O O T. S A W U N. E J C G E. N C K H W. T B A T E. E D A M R. X G A V E. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game . - 2 groups take part in the game .. * Went, came , ate , saw , gave , did , took , made , was , -Ask Ss to find the past tense of irregular verbs bought , were , sent , cut , won - Remark . , had . II.New lesson : 1.A3 :Read Nam’s diary : 15 min - Ask Ss to look at Nam’s diary and tell about.

(157) -. Nam’s daily routines . Call on one student to read Nam’s diary . Have Ss work in pairs asking answering about Nam’s daily routines . Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . Ask them to write a diary about themselves based on Nam’s diary . Ask them to exchange their writing with the partner . Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. Remark .. 2.A4: Write. Complete Hoa’s reply to her mother with suitable verbs :18 min - Ask Ss to talk about Hoa’s mom letter . - Give some cues or questions : + Did Hoa get a letter from her mother ? + Did her mom visit her after the harvest ? + Can Hoa take care of herself ? + Does she get up early every morning ? + Des she go to bed late ? + Will she write to her mom soon ? - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Remark . - Ask Ss to look at the letter in the book then complete the letter with the suitable words . - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . Was , having , show , take , get , go , wash , iron , eating , told , see/ meet , go . - Ask Ss to work in groups of four writing the. - Read Nam’s diary .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. -Write a diary based on Nam’s diary. - Exchange the writing with the partner . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. _ Talk about Hoa’s mom letter .. - Work in pairs . Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Complete the letter .. - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Copy down ..

(158) letter on the posters . - Call on some groups to read the letter in front of - Work in groups of four . the class . - Ask Ss to put their letters on the board then - Read the letters in front of compare their work . the class . III.Consolidation : 5 min - Put the letters on the board . - Ask Ss to write a letter to their penpal telling what they do everyday . - Write a letter to a penpal . - Go around class and provide help . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Read the letter aloud . - Remark . - Ask ss to read part “ remember” IV.Homework : 2 min - read and remember. - Write the letter in the notebook . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 63 in workbook . - Write homework . - Prepare part B1 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 20/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 27/01/2016 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Period 63 : Lesson 4 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B1 ) A. Objectives : - After the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about a visit to the dentist . They will be used to asking and answering about this topic . 1.Vocabulary : - Dentist - To fill - Appointment - To hate - Drill - To hurt - Cavity - Scared 2.Grammar : - The simple present and past tense - What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ? B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture about the heath C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities. Students’ Activities.

(159) I.Warm up : 3 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Hangman Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel - Remark . 2.New lesson : 1. Lead in the lesson: 2 min - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What will you do if you have a tooth ache? + When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist do ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What’s the matter with Minh , the boy in the picture ? 2. Presentation: 10 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . + Dentist ( n ) : + An appointment ( n ) : + Scared ( adj ) : + Cavity ( n ) : + To fill ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v ) + To hurt ( v ) : + Drill ( n ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . * Checking technique : Slap the board .. - Greetings . - Play a game .. - Answer the questions .. -Look at the picture then answer the questions .. -Listen and write down .. - Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .. - Play a game : Slap the board . - Two groups take part in the game .. 3. Practice : 18 min - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the questions : + What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ? +What happened to Hoa last week ? + How did the doctor help Hoa ? - Play the tape for Ss . - Listen to the tape , then find the answers . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to read after the - Read after the tape . tape . - Ask Ss to answer the questions above . - Answer the questions . - Correct and give the correct answers . - Listen ..

(160) - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1.Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ? 2What is wrong with Minh ? 3.LN 4.Does Minh like going to the dentist ? How do you know ? 5.Are you scared of seeing the dentist ? 6.LN 7.What did the dentist do with Hoa’s toothache ? 8.What did you do the last time you had a bad toothache ? 9.LN 10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ? - remark . -Ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks . III.Consolidation : 5 min * Have Ss play a game : Find someone who? Find someone who Name ….has a toothache ? ….likes going to the dentist ? …is scared of seeing the dentist ?. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Read the dialogue again and find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Play a game in groups .. - Answer the questions .. - Write the answers in the notebooks . - Play a game. EX : S1: Do you have a toothache ? S2 : Yes / No - Ask and asnwer in front of the S1 : Do you like going to the dentist ? class . - Remark . IV.Homework : 2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines - Write homework . for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 63 in workbook . - Prepare part B2,3 ..

(161) * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ Ngày soạn: 26/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 01/02/2016 WEEK 23 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Period 64 :Lesson 5 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B2,3 ) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Dr Lai’s job . They continue to practice about the topic of toothache . Practice listening and reading skills . 1.Vocabulary : - To explain - To remind - Sensibly - Surgery - To smile - To check - To notice 2.Grammar : Review : the simple present tense B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture about the heath C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board Dentist Appointmen t. Scared Hurt. Toothach e. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game . - Two groups take part in the game .. Cavity. II.New lesson : B2/Listen and answer : 20 min - Introduce the situation of the listening . -Listen to the teacher . - Ask Ss to read the questions in the book then - Read the questions in the book guess the answers for the questions . and guess the answers ( work in groups) - Call on some groups to give - Give the predictions . their answers. - Play the tape for Ss checking their predictions . -Listen and check.

(162) - Explain some new words to Ss. the predictions . + To explain ( v ) : - Listen and write down . + To remind ( v ) : + Sensibly ( adv ) : + Surgrey ( n ) : + To smile ( v ) : + To notice ( v ) : + Serious ( adj ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . -Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning - Play the tape again for Ss. then copy down . - Listen to the tape to check the - Ask Ss to give the answers . predictions . - Play the tape again for Ss checking the answers - Give the answers . . - Check the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . a. Dr Lai is a dentist . -Write the answers in the b. She wears uniform to work . notebooks . c. Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai . d. She explains what will happen. She gives them advice . B3.Listen and read : 15 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions : - Look at the picture and answer + What is the matter with Minh ? the questions . + How does he feel ? + What is the doctor doing ? + Why does that happen to Minh ? - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape - Give the answers . ( two times ) - Look at the book and listen to - Have Ss read the text in silent . the tape . - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of the - Read the text in silent . class . - Read the text aloud . - Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable words . - Complete the story with the - Have Ss exchange the results with their suitable words . partners . - Exchange the result with the - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of partner ..

(163) the class . - Correct the mistakes then give the answer key : Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices this . She smiles to Minh and tells him not to worry . She explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to brush them regularly . After Dr Lai fills his tooth , Minh leaves . He is very pleased - Call on some Ss to read the completed the story aloud . III.Consolidation :3 min - Repeat the content of the lesson . IV.Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercises 2,3 at page 65 in workbook . - Prepare part 4,5 .. - Give the answers in front of the class . - Listen and write down .. - Read the story aloud .. - Listen to the teacher . - Write homework .. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 27/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 02/02/2016 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGYIENE Period 65 :Lesson 6 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B 4, 5, Remember ) A. Objectives : The students continue to practice speaking about health and hygiene , using simple present tense . - Practice vocabulary about health and hygiene . - The present simple tense . B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture …… C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.English test :15 min 1.Put the following verbs in the correct row. - Do the test in to the paper. (3,0ps) Wanted,worked,played,studied,visited,helped, missed,needed,returned,watched. /Id/: /t/:.

(164) /d/: 2.Make question for the underlined words.(7,0ps) a.I saw her last night. b.Her neighbor gave her a nice dress. c.They returned to America two weeks ago . d.Mrs Robinson bought a poster. e. My father was in Ha Noi last month. f. He travelled to Nha Trang by coach. g. She went to the doctor because she was sick. II.New lesson : B4/Ask and answer qurstions with a partner . Use the words to help you : 10 min - Ask Ss to tell what happenned to Minh . - Introduce the way to make sentence and the question : why and the answer to Ss . - Make example : Minh’s tooth hurts . Why ? Because he has a cavity . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and model then work in pairs asking and answering based on the pictures and the words given . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer . a. Minh is nervous . Why ? Because he is seeing the dentist . b. the cavity is not serious . Why ? Because it is small. c. Minh is happy . Why ? Because his teeth are OK. - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . B5/Write . Complete this poster with a partner : 12 min - Introduce the situation and the aim of the exercise to Ss. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and examples.. - Tell what happened to Minh . - Listen to the teacher .. - Work in pairs .. - Practice in front of the class . - Listen and write down .. - Listen to the teacher . - Look at the pictures and the.

(165) - Have Ss look at the pictures and write example . sentences as model . - Write sentences . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partner. - Exchange the result with the - Call on some Ss to give their ideas in front of partner . the class . - Give the ideas in front of the - Correct the mistake . class. III.Consolidation :5 min - Write down . - Ask Ss to work in groups discussing the question: What should we do and what - Work in groups . shouldn’t we do if we want to have healthy teeth? - Go around class and provide the help. - Call on some Ss from some groups to present their ideas in front of the class. - Demonstrate their ideas in front - Remark and give marks of the class. - Read part : remember IV.Homework : 3 min - listen and remember. - Write the poster : what should we do and shouldn’t do if we have healthy teeth ? - Write homework . - Do exercise 4 at page 65 in workbook . - Prepare unit 11 – A1 * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Unit 11: keep fit and stay healthy I .Aims: After finishing the unit Ss will be able to Give instructions, requests Talk about the height and weigh… Read and fill in medical record Health and safety precautions Express preferencest Talk about common sicknesses, symptoms, cures, know how to have a healthy body 1. Knowledge. a. Vocabulary medical check- up, fill in, medical record, mouth, normal, height male female, forename, surname total, due to, account for, sick note… b. Structures present simple tense Past simple tense Would you + verb …?.

(166) -. Everybody, nobody Help SO something 2. Skills: Listening, speaking,reading,writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about a medical check- up . They can practice asking and answering about the personal information + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen for details to complete the dialogue , listen and answer the questions. + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read a letter or a diary and answer the questions + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write sentences that use the present simple and past simple. II.Teaching methods - Communicative, substitutions,Eliciting , pair work , group work or work individually. III.Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about common sickness, and health … IV. Anticipated problem: Health , safety precautions , common sicknesses, symptoms, cures and know how to have a healthy body V. Procedures From period 66th to 70th -Lesson 1:A1 -Lesson 2:A2+A3+Remember -Lesson 3:B1 -Lesson 4:B2 -Lesson 5:B4+B5+Remember Ngày soạn: 27/01/2016 Ngày dạy: 03/02/2016 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY. Period 66 : Lesson 1 : A- A check - up ( A1 ) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and give the requests and the reponses . 1.Vocabulary : - Medical check – up - To measure - Medical record - To weigh - Height - Weight - Temperature - To take one’s temperature - Scales - Normal 2.Grammar : - The structure : Would you + V…. ? - Review the simple present tense B. Teaching aids : -.

(167) - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture …… C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer the questions . + Do you eat much candy ? + Do you often eat ice- creams? + How often do you brush your teeth ? + If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ? - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson: 1. Presentation:15 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess : -Look at the picture and answer Where are they ? the questions . What are they doing ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then - Listen to the teacher . explain some new words to Ss . + Medical check- up ( n ) : + Medical record ( n ) : + Height ( n ) : + To measure ( v ) : - Read new words in chorus and + To weigh ( v ) : individually , guess the meanings + Temperature ( n ) : , then copy down . + To take one’s temperature + Scales ( n ) : + Normal ( adj ) : + Structure : Would you open your mouth , please ? Would you + V ? - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . *Checking technique : Rub out and remember - Play a game : rub out and . remember . - Have Ss guess the content of the dialogue and - Guess the order of the order the sentences . sentences . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions in - Give the predictions in front of front of the class . the class . 2. Practice : 18 min - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the - Look at the books and listen to.

(168) tape then check their order . - Ask them to read the dialogue again and give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B - Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the notebooks. - - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . *Comprehension questions : -Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1. What were the students of QT school doing ? 2. LN 3. Who was doing the medical check – up ? 4. What did the nurse do ? 5. LN 6. What was Hoa’s temperature ? Was it normal? 7. What was her height ? 8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ? - Remark . III.Consolidation :5 min - Ask Ss to use the structure : Would you + V ? to make the sentences by playing a game : Noughts and crosses .. the tape . - Read the dialogue and check the predictions .. - Write the correct answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Play a game :. - Answer the questions 2 groups take part in the game .. - Play a game :Noughts and crosses. Make sentences with the cues . - Make example : Would you open your mouth , please ? Remark . IV.Homework:2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook . - Prepare part 2, 3 ..

(169) * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 10/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 15/02/2016 WEEK 24. UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Period 67 : Lesson 2 : A- A check – up ( A 2 , 3, remember ) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 2. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture …… C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board - Play a game : Slap the board . Normal. Medical record. Medical check up. Height. Weigh. Measure. 2 groups take part in the game .. Scales. - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . II.New lesson : A. Listen . Then write the missing words : 15 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words . - Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find out the words to fill in the blanks .. - Clap the hands .. -Listen to the teacher carefully . -Read the dialogue and guess the missing words . -Listen to the tape carefully ..

(170) - Ask Ss to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . Name. Male/Fe. Age. Weight. - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Listen and copy down .. Height. Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ? Hoa : Fourteen . Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ? Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured me . Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ? Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters . Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ? Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms . Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms . - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . B. Ask and answer questions with a partner : 18 min - Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions : + Which school does he go to ? + What is his surname ? + How tall is he ? = What’s his height ? + What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ? - Ask Ss to work in pairs : One is A , the other is B asking and answering the information to complete the medical record . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the. -Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice the dialogue in front of the class .. - Listen to the teacher and write down .. - Work in pairs ..

(171) class . - Some pairs pratice in front of the - Correct the mistakes if necessary . class . - Ask Ss to complete the form in their notebooks - Complete the form in the . notebooks . - III.Consolidation :5 min - Have Ss play a game : Survey . - Play a game . - Ask Ss to work in groups : Ask their friends in order to have information and write in the form - Work in groups . . - Call on some groups to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class. class . IV.Homework :2min - Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook . - Write homework . - Prepare part B1 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ Ngày soạn: 11/2/2016 Ngày dạy: 16/2/2016 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Period 68 : Lesson 3 : B – What was wrong with you ? ( B1 ) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer questions about sickness and further practice in the past simple , question forms and negative forms . 1. Vocabulary : - Bad cold - Sick note - Stomachache - Headache - Virus - Flu 2. Grammar : - The simple past tense : question forms and negative forms . - Structures : What is/ was wrong with sb ? I have/ had a headache . She has / had a bad cold . B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture …… C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions about themselves . - Answer T’s questions . EX: How tall are you ? What’ s your weight ? How old are you ?.

(172) …………….. - Remark and give marks . II. New lesson: 1.Presentation :15 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson the explain some new words and structures : + To have a bad cold : a headache . a virus . flu . a stomachache . + To be sick = to be ill . + Sick note ( n ) : Have Ss play a game Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ? EX: What was wrong with you ? I had a headache . 2.Practice :18 min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions : + Look at balloon 1 : Lan wasnot there . She was absent . What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? What was wrong with her ? ( look at balloon 2 ) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape and look at the books then check the answers. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . -. - Listen to the teacher and copy down . Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings then copy down .. - Make sentences : What was wrong with her ? She had a bad cold .. - Look at the pictures and answer the questions .. - Read the dialogue in silent to find out the answers . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Listen to the tape and check the answers . - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class. front of the class . Correct their pronunciation. Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering - Work in pairs . the questions in the books . Call on some pairs to ask and answer the - Practice asking and answering in questions in front of the class . front of the class. Correct the mistake and give the correct - Copy down . answers :.

(173) a) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a bad cold . b) She had a headache . c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess . d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus . e) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note . III.Consolidation: 5 min - Give some cues and ask Ss to practice in pairs . - Work in pairs . You / a cold . She / toothache . Lan / headache . He / flu . Ba / Stomachache . Make example : S1 : What was wrong with you ? - Listen . S2: I had a cold . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front - Work in pairs . of the class . - Practice in front of the class. - Remark . IV.Homework :2min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in workbook . - Prepare part 2,3 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ Ngày soạn: 12/2/2016 Ngày dạy: 17/2/2016 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Period 69 :Lesson 4 : B- What was wrong with you ? ( B2 ) A . Objectives : The students continue to review vocabulary about the common illness. Then they can practice asking and answering skills . - Review vocabulary about the common illness . - The simple past tense . B. Teaching aids : - text book, tape, computer, OHP, picture …… C. Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks - Play a game : Networks Common illness.

(174) 2 groups take part in the game . - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . II.New lesson: 1.Take a survey : 25 min - Introduce the aim of the exercise . - Ask Ss to work in groups of four and ask them to choose a secretary for their group. - Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey EX: Were you absent from school last semester ? Did you have a cold ? a stomachache ? the flu ? a toothache ? -Ask the secretaries to give the results of their groups . - Combine the result for the whole class . - Ask Ss to answer the questions : What was the most common illness? What was the least common illness? - Remark . 2.Further practice: 10 min - Ask ss to play a game : Noughts and crosses. flu Eye ache absent cold headache stomachache toothache ill sick - Aks ss to use : Yes/No- questions III.Consolidation :3min - Ask Ss to give the days lost through sickness in their own class - Ask some Ss to report in front of the class . EX: Last semester in their own class, cold caused …. days’ absence but stomachache caused … days’absence ……. - Remark . IV.Homework :2 min - Write the comparision in the notebooks .. - Listen to the teacher . - Work in groups .. - Take a survey .. - Give the results of the groups .. - Answer the questions . - Copy the answer in the notebooks. - Discuss in 2 groups to play this game.. - Give the days lost through sickness in their own class - Report in front of the class ..

(175) - Do exercise 3 at page 71 in workbook . - Prepare part 4. - Write homework .. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ Ngày soạn: 17/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 22/02/2016 WEEK 25 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Period 70 : Lesson 5 : B – What was wrong with you ? ( B4,5, REmember ) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the common cold and the cues to prevent it . Practice readind skill. 1.Vocabulary : - Disease - Symptom - Runny nose - Slight fever - To cough - To sneeze - To prevent - To relieve - Cure => to cure - To disappear 2.Grammar : The simple present tense B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, picture …… C. Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Play a game : guessing game . - Ask Ss to write a disease which they caught - All class take part in the game . last time in a paper sheet . - Have one student go to the board and others guess . - Remark , ask Ss some questions about the disease they caught and lead in the new lesson . II.New lesson: 1.Pre- reading :13 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . - Listen to the teacher carefully . + Disease ( n ) : BÖnh.

(176) + Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng + Runny nose ( n ) : Sæ mòi + Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ + To cough ( v ) : Ho + To sneeze ( v ) : H¾t h¬i + To relieve ( v ) : Lµm gi¶m + To prevent ( v ) : Ng¨n ngõa + To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt + Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Ch÷a trÞ - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss work in groups discussing the questions : + Why do people call the cold “ common “? + What are the symptoms of the common cold ? - Call some Ss from groups to give their discussion in front of the class . 2.While – reading :15 min - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their discussion . - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to answer the pre- questions . - Have some Ss read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss read the text again and find out the answers for the questions in the book. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers : a) Because every year millions of people catch it . b) They are : a runny nose , a slight fever , coughing and sneezing . c) No, there is no cure for the common cold . d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold ,. - Read new words in chorus and individually , then guess the meanings and copy down . - Play a game . - Work in groups .. - Give the answers in front of the class . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Read the text in silent . - Answer the questions . - Read the text aloud . - Read the text again and find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Copy down ..

(177) but they relieve the symptoms . e) We can prevent a cold by eating well , doing exercise , keeping fit and staying healthy . 3.Post – reading :7min - Ask Ss to write about the common cold . - Call on some Ss to read their writings in front - Write about the common cold . of the class . - Read the writing aloud . - Remark . III. Consolidation: 3 min - Ask ss to retell the symtoms of the common cold and the way how to prevent it. - Some ss to retell in front of the IV.Homework :2 min class. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook - Write homework. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 18/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 23/02/2016 Period 71 : written test A. Objectives: The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will know each student and class’s knowledge and have the method to teach. B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : prepare a written test - Students: Review C/The content of the test. . Ma trËn :. Chủ đề. NhËn biÕt KQ TL. I. Listening. Th«ng hiÓu KQ TL 4. VËn dông KQ TL. Tæng 4. 2.0 II. Reading. 2. 2.0 2. 1.0 III. Language focus IV.Writing. 8. 4 2.0. 4 1.0. 2.0 16. 1.0. 4,0. 4 1.0 4. 4.

(178) Tæng. 8. 4. 6. 2.0 10. 2.0 28. 2.0 1.0 3.0 4.0 10 I.Listen and answer the questions :2ps 1.What does Dr Loan do? ............................................................................................... 2. How is Dr Loan’s surgery? ........................................................................................ 3. How do most children feel when they come to see Dr Loan ? ....................................................................................................................................... 4.Does she often give children advice?. ............................................................................... II. Read the passage . then answer the question:2ps Huong was absent from class yesterday because she had a bad cold. She had to stay in bed all day. Her Mother took her temperature three times. Huong took medicines and drank orange juice. Now she is still lying in bed, but she feels a lot better. 1. Why was Huong absent from class yesterday? ....................................................................................................................................... 2.What did she have to do? ....................................................................................................................................... 3.Who took her temperature? ....................................................................................................................................... 4.How is she now? ....................................................................................................................................... III.Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense:1ps 1. Mr Jones ( come) ......................................to Vietnam to work last year 2. We ( not have)............................................classes tomorrow 3. It (be)......................quite along way from here to Nam Dinh city 4. My brother ( study ) .......................................his lesson at the moment VI. Choose the best answer: 2ps 1.Last week, The Robinsons …………………..to a new apartment. a. move b.moves c. moved 2.It’s not difficult …………..a new dress. a. make b.making c. to make 3. Hoa watched her neighbor …………..her dress. a. make b.to make c. made 4. ……………..is a person who lives near you. a. hairdresser b. neighbor c. Teacher 5…………………did she go to the dentist last week? a. When b. What c. Why 6.Everyday, I get up early to………………….morning exercises. a. do b.take c. a and b 7. I need ………………..your height. a. measure b.to measure c. measuring. 8. Are you scared …………………seeing the dentist ?.

(179) a. for b. of c. in V. Match a question inA with its answer in B:1,0ps A B 1. What is the matter? a. He is 38 kilos 2. When did Nam go to the dentist? b. Because she was ill 3. What’s his weight ? c. I have a headache 4.Why didn’t Lan go to school? d. A week ago 1234VI. Write sentences as directed:2ps 1. My father wrote sicknote for me ( turn in to negative) ....................................................................................................................................... 2. My mother bougt a new car two days ago ( turn in to interrogative) ....................................................................................................................................... 3. She is 45 kilos ( Make question with “ what”) ......................................................................................................................................... 4. Hoa didn’t go to school because she had a headache( Make question with “ why”) ..................................................................................................................................... *Tapescript Dr Loan is a dentist . Her surgery is always clean .Most childen is scared when they come to her. But She is very kind .She always smiles at them.She explains them what will happen and gives them advice * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 18/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 24/02/2016 Period 72 :Correcting the test A.Objectives : After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English. B. Teaching aids : Test papers, chalk, board. C. Procedure: 1. Warm up : - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions . 2. Correcting the test: a) Remark the good and bad of the test and correct common mistakes. b) Deliver the test papers and give the correct answers: I.Listen and answer the questions :2ps 1 She is a dentist 2 It is clean 3 They feel scared 4 Yes, she does.

(180) II. Read the passage . then answer the question:2ps 1 .Because she had a bad cold 2.She had to stay in bad all day 3.Her mother took temperature 4. she feels a lot better III.Put the verbs in brackets in the correct tense:1ps 1. came 2.won’t have 3. is 4.is studying IV. Chose the best answer. 0,25p for each correct answer 1.a 2.c 3d 4a 5b 6c 7b 8b V. Match a question inA with its answer in B:1,0ps 1-c 2-d 3-a 4-b VI. Write sentences as directed:2ps 1: My mother didn’t write sicknote for me 2: Did your mother buy a new car two days ago 3: What is your weight? 4: Why didn’t Hoa go to school? Tapescript Dr Loan is a dentist . Her surgery is always clean .Most childen is scared when they come to her. But She is very kind .She always smiles at them.She explains them what will happen and gives them advice. UNIT 12: LET’S EAT! I. Aims: - After finishing the uint Ss will be able to : + Talk about popular food + Express preference describe how to make a meal + Talk about diets. + Know how eat sensibly to have healthy body 1. Knowledge 1.Vocabulary - pork, carrot, spinach, cucumber, papaya, pineapple, durian, ripe, smell, stir- fry, boil, heat, add, plat, spoon, chopstick, bowl, glass,unhealthy food, moderate amounts, balanced diet, fatty food, body- building food, cereals, protective, energy- giving, … 2.Structures past simple tense too/ either so/ neither 3.Skills: Listening, speaking,reading,writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about common food and balanced diet. They can practice speaking about their hobbies with so /too / neither /either + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen for details to complete the story , listen and write the name of food and drink..

(181) + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read and answer the questions + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write a menu and describle how to make a meal . II.Teaching methods - Communicative, substitutions,Eliciting , pair work , group work or work individually. III.Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the food… IV. Anticipated problem: Help students know how to have a balanced diet and eat sensibly to have healthy body. V. Procedures From period 73th to 77th -Lesson 1:A1+A2 -Lesson 2:A3,A4,A5+Remember -Lesson 3:B1 -Lesson 4:B2+B3 -Lesson 5:B4+B5+Remember WEEK 26 Ngày soạn: 24/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 29/02/2016 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT! Period 73 : Lesson 1 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A1, A2 ) A . Objectives : - By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the details and practice food vocabulary . And they can use the structures : I don’t like …..either , I like …… too / neither do I , So do I to express preferences . - Practice speaking skill . 1.Vocabulary : - Spinach - Durian - cucumber - Papaya - Pineapple - Ripe -To smell 2.Grammar : - The simple present tense . - The structures : I’d like……. So do I / I do , too Neither do I / I don’t , either . B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the food… C. Procedures : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min.

(182) - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Kim’s game . ( Use the pictures or words written on the board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk , bananas, apples , carrots , oranges ) - Call the students to go to the board and write again . - Remark and lead in the new lesson . II.New lesson : A1:Listen and read. Then practice with a partner: 20 min. - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you usually go to the market ? + Who do you often go to the market with ? + What do you often see / buy at the market ? ……………….. - Introduce the situation of the lesson to Ss and ask Ss to guess what Hoa and her aunt bought at the market . - Have Ss look at the pictures and listen to the tape . - Ask Ss to look at the book and read after the tape . - Explain some new words and structures to Ss + Spinach ( n ) : Rau ch©n vÞt + Cucumber ( n ) : Da chuét + Papaya ( n ) : Đu đủ + Pineapple ( n ) : Qu¶ døa + Durian ( n ) : Qu¶ sÇu riªng + Ripe ( adj ) : chÝn + To smell ( v ) : ngöi thÊy / cã mïi Structures : + I like spinach and cucumbers .  So do I / I do , too. + I don’t like pork .  Neither do I ./ I don’t , either . * Have Ss play a game : What and where . - Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation .. - Greetings . - Play a game .. - Go to the board and write .. - Answer teacher’s questions .. - Listen to the teacher and guess what they bought . - Look at the pictures and listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Listen and write .. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings and copy down .. Make sentences as models.. Play a game . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class ..

(183) - Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to find out the answer in the book . - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1) What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ? 2) LN. 3) Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt ? 4) LN. 5) What meat would they like for dinner ? 6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt? 7) LN 8) What fruit did they buy ? 9) Why didn’t they buy a papaya ? 10) LN - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . - Ask Ss to write the answer in the notebook A2:Ask and answer questions with a partner. Talk about the food you like : 15min - Explain some sentences of Hoa and her aunt in the dialogues . - Model sentences : S1: I don’t like pork . S2: Neither do I / I don’t either . S1: I like spinach and cucumbers . S2: So do I / I do , too. ( So and too are used in the formative sentences . Neither and either are used in the negative sentences .). - Read the dialogues again to find the answer . - Play a game in 2 groups .. Take the numbers and answer the questions .. - Clap the hands . - Write the answers in the notebook .. - listen. - Make sentences as models. EX: S1: I am a student . S2: So am I / I am , too . S1: I like beef . S2: I do , too . / So do I . S1: She isn’t a doctor . S2: I am not , either . / Neither am I . S1: I don’t like chicken . S2: I don’t , either / Neither do I . ( Not either = Neither ) - Give some pictures or given words to Ss to - Practicing using given words . practice . + Carrots . X + Beef V + Papaya V + Cabbage X + Fish X + Chicken V - Have Ss work in pairs using the structures they - Work in pairs ..

(184) have just learnt and given words . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class . class . S1: I don’t like carrots . - Remark . S2: Neither do I / I don’t , either S1: I like beef . S2: So do I / I do , too. - Write down . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Practice in pairs ( free ) - Have Ss practice in pairs . - Practice in front of the - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . class . - Remark . III.Consolidation : 3min - Talk about the food . - Have Ss talk about the food they like and - Work in groups making dislike . conversations . - Ask Ss to work in group of four making real conversations about shopping . - Practice in front of the - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class . class . - Remark and give marks . IV .Homework :2 min - Write homework . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 74 in workbook . - Prepare part 2 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 26/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 01/03/2016 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Period 74 : Lesson 2 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A3a,4,5,Remember ) A . Objectives : - After finishing the lesson , Students will understand how to make a meal by making some dishes 1.Vocabulary : - To slice - Bowl - To boil - To heat - To stir- fry - Soy sauce.

(185) - Chopsticks - Spoon 2.Grammar : The past simple tense B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette ,OHP , computer and pictures . C.Procedures : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions : EX: Do you like chicken? Beef ? Do you know how to prepare a meal ?  Lead in the new lesson . II.New lesson : A3.Read . then answer the questions : 20min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What is she doing ? - Call on some Ss to give the answer . - Introduce the situation and explain some new words to Ss . + To slice ( v ) : Th¸i + To boil ( v ) : Luéc + To heat ( v ) : ®un nãng + To stir – fry ( v ) : Xµo + Bowl ( n ) : C¸i b¸t + Chopsticks ( n ) : §òa + Soy sauce ( n ) : X× dÇu + Spoon ( n ) : Th×a - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . *Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss guess the order of the statements : a) First , she sliced the beef . b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some spinach . c) Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner . d) Next, she sliced some green peppers and. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer teacher’s questions .. - Look at the pictures and answer the question . - Listen to the teacher .. Read new words in chorus and individually guess the meanings , then copy down .. - Play a game . - Do exercise ..

(186) onions . e) And then she set the table and the family sat down to eat . f) After that she stir- fried the beef and vegetables . g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made cucumber salad . - Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the sentences . - Call on some groups to give their prediction - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the order . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Ask Ss to work in groups to write the menu - Call on some groups to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : + Cucumber salad with onions . + Boiled spinach + Stir- fried beef with green peppers and onions + Rice A4.Write . What did you eat and drink yesterday ? 10min - Ask some Ss the questions : what did you eat and drink yesterday ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . A5. Play with words : 5 min - Explain some new words. - Play the tape and ask ss to listen and repeat - Call on some ss to read before the class. III. Consolidation : 3 min - Have Ss write a short paragraph to tell what they ate and drank yesterday . - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the order . - Give the answers. -. Read the text in silent . Read the text aloud . Work in groups . Give the answers . Write down .. - Asnwer the question . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - listen and write. - Listen and repeat - Read the text before the class. - Write a short paragraph . - Read the writing in front of.

(187) of the class . the class . - Remark . IV.Homework : 2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines - Write homework . for each . - Learnt by heart part remember. - Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook . - Prepare B1 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 26/02/2016 Ngày dạy: 02/03/2016 UNIT 12 : LET’ S EAT ! Period 75 :Lesson 3 : B – Our food ( B1 ) A.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctor’s and the reason which caused Ba’s stomachache . *The structures : - It must be ………….. - It was probably ……… - Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt . - Thepast simple tense and present simple tense . B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette ,OHP , computer and pictures . C.Procedures: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game . - Play a game . ( Each student writes a sentence about the - All class take part in the disease they had last time . One student game . goes to the board and the rest guess ) - Remark and lead in the new lesson . II.New lesson: 1. Presentation : 15 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the - Look at the picture question : carefully . Where is Ba ? What is the matter with him ? - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . - Give the predictions ..

(188) - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Call on some Ss to give the correct answers + Ba is at the doctor’s . + He has an awful stomachache . - Explain some structures to Ss . + It must be something you ate . + It was probably the spinach . + That dirt can make you sick . + These medicine will make you feel better. - Have Ss make sentences with the structures 2. Practice : 20 min - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . *Comprehension questions : - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers . 1. What did Ba eat last night ? 2.Who washed the spinach ? 3.LN 4.Why did Ba go to the doctor? 5.Did his parents eat spinach ? 6.LN 7.What made him sick ? 8.What did the doctor give him ? -Remark and state the group which wins the game . *Now complete the story . - Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above . - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Give the answers .. - Listen to the teacher and copy down .. - Make sentences using the structures . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class . - Play a game - 2 groups take part in the game .. - Clap hands .. - Complete the story .. - Exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of - Give the result . the class . - Correct and give answer key : - Copy down . Ba went to the doctor because he was sick . The doctor asked Ba some questions . Ba said he had some spinach last night . The doctor said he must wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty . The dirt can make.

(189) people sick . She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make him feel better . - Call on some Ss to read the story in front of - Read the story aloud . the class . III.Consolidation :3 min - Repeat the content of the lesson and the - Listen carefully . structures . IV.Homework :2 min - Learn by heart the structures by making 3 - Write homework . sentences with each . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in workbook . - Prepare part B2. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 02/03/2016 Ngày dạy: 07/03/2016 WEEK 27. UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Period 76 : Lesson 4 : B – Our food ( B2,3) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . They will know what they should do to have a healthy lifestyle. 1.Vocabulary : - Balanced diet - Energy - To affect - Body- building food - Moderate - Dairy product - Amount - Cereals - Lifestyle - Plenty of 2.Grammar : B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette ,OHP , computer and pictures . C.Procedures: Teacher’sActivities Students’ Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer T’s questions . + What do you usually have for breakfast / lunch / dinner ? + What is your favorite food ?.

(190) - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson. 1. Presentation: 15 min - Introduce the situation : “ Food plays an important part in our life . It gives us the main energy for body development . thus , a balanced diet is especially important . In our today’s lesson , we will learn about the definition of a balanced diet and useful guidelines about food” - Explain some new words and phrases to Ss. + Balanced diet ( n ) : Chế độ ăn hợp lí + To affect ( v ) : ¶nh hëng + Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n ) + Amount ( n ) : Sè lîng + Energy ( n ) : N¨ng lîng + Body- building food ( n ) : Thøc ¨n gióp ph¸t triÓn c¬ thÓ. + Dairy product ( n ) : Thùc phÈm b¬ s÷a + Cereals ( n ) : Ngò cèc + Lifestyle ( n ) : Lèi sèng + Fatty food ( n ) : Thøc ¨n giµu chÊt bÐo - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember . - Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F prediction What does a balanced diet mean? 1) Eat a lot of meat . 2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables . 3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar . 4) Eat a little fatty food . 5) Eat plenty of food you like . - Have Ss discuss in groups . - Call on Ss to give their discussion . - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer : 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 2. Practice : 18 min - Have Ss read the passage in silent . - Call on 3 or 4 students to read the passage aloud .. - Listen to the teacher .. - Listen and write .. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings , then copy down .. - Play a game . - Do exercise .. - Work in groups . - Give their prediction. - Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Give the answers ..

(191) - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy b) No.A balanced diet is not enough all people need exercise to keep a healthy life . c) Ss’ Answers . *B3.Write a menu for yourself and your family,including details of breakfast,lunch and dinner. - Ask ss to look at the picture to write. Then compare with their partner. - Read in silent . - Some Ss read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again to find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Write the answers in the notebooks .. - work individually to write - Call on some ss to write a menu for breakfast, a menu. lunch and dinner. - Compare with their - Remark and correct. partner. III.Consolidation : 5 min - Write them on the board. - Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching - Listen and write. A lot of Should. A little Too much. Shouldn’t. Plenty of. Sugar Fatty food Meat Fruit. - Do exercise .. Coffee Deep- fried food Vegetables Eggs. - Ask Ss match and talk about a balanced diet . - Make example : To have a balanced diet we should eat a lot of - Do exercise then talk fruit .......... about “ a balanced diet “ - Have Ss work in groups . - Listen . - Call on some gr oups to give their dicussion in front of the class . - Work in groups . - Remark . - Give the discussion in IV.Homework : 2 min front of the class . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for.

(192) each . - Write a menu for yourself and your family . -Write homework . - Prepare part 4 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 03 / 3 / 2016 Ngày dạy: 08 / 3 / 2016 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Period 77 : Lesson 5 : B- Our food ( B4,5,remember ) A .Objectives : The students will listen to a text for details and further practice in food vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill . - Review the food vocabulary . - The past simple tense B.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette ,OHP , computer and pictures . C.Procedures: Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . - Play a game : Slap the board . Moderate Body-building food Energy Dairy product. Amount. Affect. Balanced diet. - Have 6 students from 2 groups take part in the - 2 groups take part in the game . game . - Remark and state the group which wins the game . - Clap the hands II. New lesson: 1. Pre – listening :10 min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the things in the pictures. - Look at the pictures and - Call on 3 or 4 students to give their answers call the names of the.

(193) - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a. Rice b. Noodles c. Fish d. Vegetables e. Fruit f. Beef g. Juice h. Water - Introduce the aim of the listening , then ask Ss to predict what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for their lunch . - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction 2. While – listening :15 min - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape , then check their prediction . - Play the tape for Ss ( two times ) - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . - Play the tape again for Ss to check . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : Lan : f, b, d ,g Nga : a, d ,g Ba : c, a , e , h Hoa : b , e , g . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and write what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for lunch . - Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud - Remark . 3.Post – listening : 7 min - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1) What did Lan have for lunch ? 2) LN . 3) Did Ba have some fruit ? 4) Who had vegetables ? 5) LN 6) Who drank juice ? 7) What did Ba drink ? 8) Did Hoa have fish ? 4.Play with words : 3 min - Explain and play the tape part B5 - Call on some ss to read it again III. Consolidation: 3 min - Remark the name of food and drinks - Past simple tense IV.Homework : 2 min - Write a paragraph about Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa. things .. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in groups . - Give the prediction . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Listen to the tape again and check the result . - Write down . - Write what Lan , Ba Nga and Hoa had for lunch . - Read the writings aloud. - Play a game in 2 groups - Answer the questions using the information in the listening .. - listen and repeat ( twice) - read individually - listen and remember. - Write homework ..

(194) had for lunch . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 77,78 in workbook . - Prepare language focus 4 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 04/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 09/3/2016 Period 78 : LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 A. Objectives : The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well . - The simple past tense . - Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much . - Too / either / neither / so . - Imperatives . B. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape ,computer, OHP , pictures . C. Procedures : Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What did you do yesterday ? + Did you watch TV last night ? + What did you do during last summer vacation ? …………….. - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.Consolidation and practice : 1.Past simple tense : 10 min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and answer what they are doing . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class . a) Watch TV . b) Eat at a restaurant .. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer T’s questions .. - Look at the pictures and answer what they are doing . - Answer the questions ..

(195) c) Go to the movie theatre . d) Read books . e) Play soccer . - Have Ss answer the questions , using the pictures . - Make example : S1: Did you do your homework last night ? S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers . f) Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ? No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant . g) Did you go to school yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre . h) Did you watch a video on the weekend ? No, I didn’t . I read books . i) Did you play basketball yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I played soccer . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . 2)Indefinite quantifiers : 8 min - Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . - Ask them to do exercise 2 . * Write the correct expression . - Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : + A little coffee . + A lot of salt . + A lot of tea . + Too much water . + A little sugar - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . * Complete the dialogues : - Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs .. -. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write down .. - Repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . - Do exercise . - Write the expression .. correct. - Give the answer . - Write down in the notebooks .. - Look at the pictures and complete the dialogues . - Work in pairs ..

(196) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . 3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither : 10 min - Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither . - Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class .. - Practice in front of the class.. - Repeat the use of too, either , so and neither . - Practice the dialogues in pairs . - Practice in front of the class - Play a game .. - Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses Mangoes V. Bananas X. Papaya X 2 groups take part in the game .. Corn. V. Fish X. Spinach X Chicken X. Potatoes X Beef V. - Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks. EX: S1: I like mangoes . S2: So do I / I do , too . S1: I don’t like bananas . S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I . 5) Imperatives : 7 min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - explain some new words : + To Peel ( v ) + To mix ( v ) + Vinegar ( n ) - Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) peel e) Add b) Wash f) Stir c) Slice g) Wait d) Mix III.Consolidation : 3 min. Make sentences with the words , using too, so , either and neither .. - Write down .. - Look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - Listen and write down .. - Give the answer . - Write down in the notebooks .. - Listen carefully ..

(197) - Repeat the structures which the students have learnt . IV. Homework : 2 min - Do test yourself 4 in workbook - Review for doing a written test .. - Write homework .. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 09/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 14/3/2016 WRITTEN TEST I. Objective : The students will apply their knowledge to do the test well . Through the test , the teacher will be able to know about Ss’ knowledge . II. Test : Written Test ( Af U12 ) No1 Time : 45 minutes I.Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. Yesterday , Hoa and her aunt ( go ) ………………to the market . I would like ( tell ) ………………you about my family . Why ( be ) …………you absent from school yesterday ? I ( be ) …………….fourteen years old next week . My father ( not watch ) …………………….TV last night . He ( read ) …………… newspapers and magazines . 6. When you ( buy ) ………………………….this dress ? - 2 days ago . 7. Be careful! the children ( cross ) ……………………….the street . II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences . 1. She ……….her teeth twice a day .( Brushed / to brush / brushes ) 2. How ……..is your brother ? - He’s one meter seventy centimeters .( high/ tall / heavy ) 3. You mustn’t …………up late .( stay / to stay / staying ) 4. He can speak English well and …………can his sister ( Too/ So / Neither ) 5. Stop please . That is too …………..coffee .( lots of / much / little ) 6. We won’t attend the meeting tomorrow and ………will he .( So / either / Neither ).

(198) 7. A balanced diet is good …………….your health .( to / with / for ) 8. I am glad ………….you’re feeling better .( hear / to hear / heard ) III.Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because of her sickness . => Because Lan …………………………………………………………… 2. What is your daughter’s age , Mrs Mai ? => How ……………………………………………………………………. 3. It took Mr. Hoang an hour to walk to work yesterday . => Mr. Hoang spent ………………………………………………………… 4. How heavy is the chicken ? => What ……………………………………………………………………… IV.Fill in the blank with the appropriate preposition. 1. Trang received a letter ………………her aunt last week . 2. You should take care ……………….yourself . 3. Eating too much candy is bad ……………….you . 4. The dentist looked ……….my teeth and he told me ……………….my broken tooth 5. What’s wrong ……………..your daughter , Mrs. Mai ? 6. We are working hard ………… the farm and your uncle often works ………….us . V.Read the passage then answer the questions . My name is John , and this is my story . Last year just before Christ mas my family and our uncle and aunt decided to go to Perth for holiday . We went in two cars but we were about halfway there my uncle wanted to turn round and come back . He said it was too far , and it was terribly hot, too. Even at night it was really hot . Anyway , what we decided to do was to drive back about 160 km to a place where the train went through . Then we put both cars on the train and we all went to Perth by train . That was fun . It was a good train . We had a good time in Perth but we had to cut our holiday short . You see , while we were there my grandmother ( mother’s mother) in Melourne died . Most of us flew back but my dad and my uncle came on the train with the two cars and then had to drive back to Melbourne from Port Pirie . 1. Why did John’s uncle want to come back ? A. Because it was too hot B. Because it was too far C. Because he was too tired D. Both A and B 2. In the end John’s family went to Perth ……………. A. By train B. By coach C. By car D. By plane 3. Who died when John’s family were on holiday ? A. His mother’s father B. His mother’s mother.

(199) C. His father’s mother D. His father’s father 4. Most of John family came back ……………… A. By train B. By ship C. By plane D. By car Written Test ( Af U12 ) Time : 45 minutes. No2. I.Choose the correct answers to complete the sentences . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.. She doesn’t like pork , and ……..does her uncle .( Either / So / Neither ) I would like ……….some fruit .( Buying / To buy / Buy ) You must drink …….water everyday . ( Much / Many / A little ) He was busy yesterday and ……….were his brothers ( So / Neither / Too) My mother didn’t wash it but I ………( didn’t / did / do ) Vegetables are good ……..your health ( To / with / for ) How ……is Nga ? She is 36 kilos . ( high / weight / heavy ) You should ……….your hands before meals .( to wash / wash / washing ). II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs . 1. Lan ( be ) …………very tired when she ( catch ) ……………a cold two days ago 2. He ( not come ) ……………………to the meeting last week . 3. I ( brush ) …………….my teeth everynight , but last night I ( forget ) …………… to brush them . 4. Where is your mother ? She ( Plant ) ……………….flowers in the garden . 5. Nga is now in her room. She ( iron ) …………………her clothes . She always ( do ) …………………it herself . III.Fill in the blanks with the suitable prepositions . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.. There is a good selection …………fruit ………….display . My aunt sliced the beef …………………thin strips . Linh set the table ……………plates , bowls , chopsticks and spoons . Salads are good ………your health , but we must wash them well ……..water . We must clean hands ……………having a meal . Hoa made cucumber salad ……………..some onions .. IV.Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. She has over 100 stamps in her collection . => There ……………………………………………………………. 2. What is the price of this cap ?.

(200) => How much……………………………………………………….. 3. How long is this river ? => What ……………………………………………………………. 4. I do my homework in an hour . => It takes …………………………………………………………… V.Read the passage then answer the questions . My name is John , and this is my story . Last year just before Christ mas my family and our uncle and aunt decided to go to Perth for holiday . We went in two cars but we were about halfway there my uncle wanted to turn round and come back . He said it was too far , and it was terribly hot, too. Even at night it was really hot . Anyway , what we decided to do was to drive back about 160 km to a place where the train went through . Then we put both cars on the train and we all went to Perth by train . That was fun . It was a good train . We had a good time in Perth but we had to cut our holiday short . You see , while we were there my grandmother ( mother’s mother ) in Melourne died . Most of us flew back but my dad and my uncle came on the train with the two cars and then had to drive back to Melbourne from Port Pirie . 1. When did John’s family go to Perth ? …………………………………………………………………………….. 2. Why did John’s uncle want to come back ? ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. How did John’s family go to Perth in the end ? ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. Who in John’s family had to go by train and car to Melbourne ? ………………………………………………………………………………. III.Remark IV.Homework : - Prepare Unit 13 – A1 . UNIT 13: ACTIVITIES Objectives After finishing the unit Ss will be able to: Describe and talk about sport activities and recreation Make and decline an invitation. Know how use the time to learn and recreate suitably 1. Vocabulary - Roller- skating, tennis, swimming, roller blading, organize, participant, inexpansive, ability, be aware of, obey, pool lifeguard, surface, pearl, diver, invent, deep – sea diving vessel … 2. Structures Adjectives and adverbs Modal verbs: should, ought to, must I..

(201) 3.Skills: Listening, speaking,reading,writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and the names of some sport activities and recreation + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen for details to complete the dialogue , listen and write an invitation and refuse an invitation . + Reading:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read and answer the questions + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write to complete the passage with the correct adverbs or adjectives in brackets and modal verbs . II.Teaching methods - Communicative, substitutions,Eliciting , pair work , group work or work individually. III.Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the sports… IV. Anticipated problem: Adjectives and adverbs V. Procedures From period 79th to 83th -Lesson 1:A1+A2 -Lesson 2:A3,A5 -Lesson 3: A4,6+Remember -Lesson 4:B1+B2 -Lesson 5:B3,4,5+Remember Week 28 Ngày soạn: 28 / 2 / 2016 Ngày dạy: 14 / 3 / 2016 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Period 79 : Lesson 1 : A – Sports ( A1,2 ) A. Objectives; By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports . 1.Vocabulary : - Skate boarding - Roller- skating - Roller – blading - Baseball - Surprisingly - Surprising result . - To win - Competition - Prize - Participant 2.Grammar : Review the simple past tense and simple present tense . Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the sports… V.Procedure :.

(202) Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up (5 min) - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you like playing sports ? + What sport do you play ? + When do you play …….? + Who do you often play with ? + What do you think about ………? ……………. - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson : A1) Listen and read . Then answer the questions( 25 min) . - Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to look at the pictures then answer the questions : What are they doing ? - Explain some new words : + Skate boarding ( n ) : + Roller- skating ( n ) : + Roller- blading ( n ) : + Baseball ( n ) : + Surprising result ( n ) : + Surprisingly ( adv ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . -. -. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer T’s questions .. - Listen to the teacher , look at the pictures and answer the question . - Listen and write down .. - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down . Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . - Play a game Have Ss discuss in groups about the question : - Work in groups . What sports do you think are the most popular in the USA ? Call on some groups to give their prediction . - Give the prediction . Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the - Look at the books , listen to tape then check their prediction . the tape and check the Call on some Ss to give the answers . prediction . Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - Give the answers . call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Read the text in silent . Have Ss answer the question : - Read the text aloud . What is the most popular sport in the USA ? - Answer the questions . Which sport is at 11th position ?.

(203) - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class . class . A2.Take a class survey : 10 min - Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates - Work in groups . what sport they like most . - Call on some groups to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class . class . - Ask Ss to write the number of students who - Write the number of the like each sport best , then complete the table in students who like each sport the notebooks . best . - Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is - Answer the question . the most popular in the class ? III. Consolidation:3 min - Retell the names of sports - Listen and remember. IV.Homework :2min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines - Write homework . for each . - Write what sports you like best . - Do exercise 1,2 in workbook . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ Week 29 Ngày soạn: 18 / 3 / 2016 Ngày dạy: 21 / 3 / 2016 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Period 80 :Lesson 2 : A – Sports ( A3,5 ) A. Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs .They will continue to talk about sports . 1.Vocabulary : - Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely - Cyclist - To cycle - To be aware of - Lifeguard - Strict - To obey 2.Grammar : Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the sports… C.Procedure :.

(204) Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks. Most popular sports in the USA. - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write . - Remark and state the group which wins the game . II.New lesson : A3.Listen . Then practice with a partner .(20 min) - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the pictures . - Explain some new words to Ss . + Good ( adj ) => well ( adv ) + Skillful ( adj ) => Skillfully ( adv ) + Safe ( adj ) => Safely ( adv ) + Cyclist ( n ) : + To cycle ( v ) = To ride a bike - Introduce how to change adjectives into adverbs and the use of Adj and Adv : Adjective + ly => adverb EX : Slow => Slowly Bad => badly Quick => quickly + He’s a good soccer player  He plays soccer well + She’s a quick runner  She runs quickly . 7. Adjectives often go with To Be 8. Adverbs often go with ordinary verbs . - Ask Ss to make sentences using adjectives and. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : Networks. Discuss in groups .. - Go to the board and write - Listen to the teacher . - Listen and write down .. Read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .. -Listen to the teacher carefully .. - Make. sentences. with. the.

(205) adverbs . - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the text . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . A5.Write . Change the adjectives in brackets to adverbs .(15 min) - Ask Ss to complete the passage with the correct adverbs in brackets . - Explain some new words to Ss . + To be aware of : + Lifeguard ( n ) + Strict ( adj ) => Strictly + To obey ( v ) - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. adjectives and adverbs . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class .. - Complete the passage with the correct adverbs . - Listen and write down .. - Exchange the result with the partner . - Call on 2=> 3 Ss to give the results in front of - Give the results in front of the the class . class . - Correct and give the correct answers - Write down . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . III.Consolidation:3 min - Repeat the way to change adjective to adverb - Listen . - Give some cues and ask Ss to make sentences - Make sentences with the cues . + Slow / slowly / swimmer + Quick / quickly / runner + Bad / badly / volleyball Make example : + She’s a slow runner  She runs slowly . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Copy down - Correct the mistakes . IV.Homework :2 min - Write homework. - Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 83 in workbook . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ .................................................

(206) ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 19/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 22/3/2016 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Period 81: Lesson 3 : A – Sports ( A4,6, Remember ) A.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will continue to talk about sports and pastimes. 1.Vocabulary : - To win - Competition - Prize - To take part in , WEF, WTS, to organize , - Participant 2.Grammar : Structure : The simple past tense Adjectivie + ly => adverb B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the sports… C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. English test : 15 minutes Choose the correct answers to complete the sentences . 1. She doesn’t like pork , and ……..does her - Do the test in to the paper. uncle .( Either / So / Neither ) 2. I would like ……….some fruit . (Buying / To buy / Buy ) 3. You must drink …….water everyday . ( Much / Many / A little ) 4. He was busy yesterday and ……….were his brothers ( So / Neither / Too) 5. My mother didn’t wash it but I ……… ( didn’t / did / do ) 6. Vegetables are good ……..your health ( To / with / for ) 7. How ……is Nga ? She is 36 kilos . ( high / weight / heavy ) 8. You should ……….your hands before meals . ( to wash / wash / washing ) II.New lesson: A4.Read . Then answer the questions .(20 min) - Look at the picture and answer - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the the question . - Answer the question. - question: what kind of sports in the picture ? - Read the text . What is WFF? WTS? - Call on some Ss to answer . - Listen and write down . - Ask Ss to read the text and check the answer..

(207) - Explain some new words to Ss. + To win ( v ) => won + Prize ( n ) : + Participant ( n ) : A person who take part in the game . - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Correct the pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers . a) He takes part in WFF. b) His school team won the first prize , they were so happy and wanted to keep this activity . c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday morning , and the other is walk- to – school day d) It’s 5 km from school to the beach . e) Wednesday is the WTS day . f) Members living near school often take part in the WTS day . - Ask Ss to copy down . A6. Play with word(3min) - Have ps listen and repeat(twice) III.Consolidation: Remember (5min) - Repeat the way to change adjective to adverb . - Give some cues and ask Ss to make sentences . + Slow / slowly / swimmer + Quick / quickly / runner + Bad / badly / volleyball Make example : + She’s a slow runner  She runs slowly . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . IV.Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 4 at page 83 in workbook .. - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Write down -Listen and repeat - Listen . - Make sentences with the cues .. - Practice in front of the class .. - Write homework..

(208) - Prepare part B1,2 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 19/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 23/3/2016 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Period 82 : Lesson 4 : B – Come and play ( B1,2 ) A.Objectives: The students will cotinue to practice about the topic of sports and in modal verbs. And practice in making , accepting and refusing an invitation , using modal verbs 1.Vocabulary : - Ought to - Paddles 2.Grammar : Making an invitation : Would you like to …………? => Yes , let’s / I’d like to / That’s a good idea . => Sorry / That’s too bad . B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the sports… C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities. Students’ Activities. 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Find someone Who . Find someone who……….. - Greetings . - Play a game .. Name. Can play soccer well. Can run quickly . Can play volleyball skillfully . Can’t swim quickly . can’t play table tennis well. - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2.New lesson : B1: Listen. Then practice with a partner (20 min) - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What are they doing ? - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the -. Listen to the teacher .. Look at the picture and answer the question . Look at the book and listen to.

(209) tape . - Explain some new words to Ss . + Ought to ( modal verb ) = must + Paddle ( n ) : + The structure : making invitation : - Would you like to play table tennis?  I’d like to . - Would you like to + V ? EX : Would you like to come to my house ? have lunch with me ? - He ought to do his homework before playing table tennis . She ought to help her mother . - Have Ss make sentences with the structures . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers for the questions . - Ask Ss to work in pairs : one asks and one answers. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers : a) He must finish his homework before he plays table tennis . b) Nam will be ready in a few minutes . c) Ba will finish a question for math . d) Ba has 2 paddles . Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . B2 : (15 min) - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation. *.Practice : - Ask Ss to make similar dialogues using the. the tape . - Listen and write down .. - Make sentences with the structures . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Read the dialogue again to find the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write in the notebook .. - Listen to the teacher . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class..

(210) cues given in the box replacing the underlined words . Make example : S1: Come and play volleyball. S2: I’m sorry . I don’t think I can . S1: That’s too bad . Why not ? S2: Well, I should visit my grandmother . S1: Can you play on the weekend ? S2: Yes, I can . S1: All right . See you on Saturday afternoon . S2: Ok. Bye . S1: Bye . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . III.Consolidation : 3 min - Give some cues and ask Ss to practice : + Nam / before / soccer / do homework . + Lan / when / swimming / swim with adult. + We / after meals / brush teeth . - Make example : S1: What should Nam do before he plays soccer ? S2: He must do his homework . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class .. - Remark IV.Homework :2 min - Write 3 dialogues in the workbook . - Do exercise 3,4 in workbook .. - Make similar dialogues , using given words . - Listen .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Practice with the cues .. - Listen .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class: S1: What should Lan do when she goes swimming ? S2: She must swim with an adult . S1: What should we do after meals? S2: We should brush our teeth . - Write homework.. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK 30.

(211) Ngày soạn: 23/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 28/3/2016 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Period 83: Lesson 5 : B- Come and play ( B3,4,5+ remember) A.Objectives : - After the lesson , Ss will know about a new sport and they continue to practice with modal verbs . - Practice reading skill. 1.Vocabulary : - Surface - Scuba diving - Underwater - To invent => invention - Pearl diver - Vessel - To explore - Special breathing equipment - Human - Opportunity 2.Grammar : Review the modal verbs . B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the sports… C.Procedure Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks - Greetings . - Play a game . Sports. - Have Ss work in groups . - Call 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and - Work in groups . write . - Go to the board and write - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson: 1. Pre- reading: 10 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss - Listen to the teacher and look to look at the pictures and answer the question : at the pictures , then answer what are the pictures about ? the question . - Explain some new words to Ss . - Listen and write . + Surface ( n ) + Underwater ( n ) + Pearl diver ( n ) = the person who dives underwater and finds the pearls . + To invent ( v => invention ( n ).

(212) + Special breathing equipment ( n ) + Scuba- diving ( n ) + Vessel ( n ) = ship + To explore ( v ) + Human ( n ) = people + Opportunity ( n ) = chance - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct the pronunciation . - Have Ss do exercise : True or False prediction ( Questions in B3 at page 137 ) - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions 2. While – reading :15 min - Have Ss read the passage and check their predictions. - Call on some Ss to give the answers and ask them to correct the false sentences .. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) -. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down . - Do exercise .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Read the passage and check the prediction . - Give the answers , then correct the false sentences a) F. Most of the world’s surface is water . b) T c) T d) F. Jacques Couteau invented a deep- sea diving vessel . e) T. Reading comprehension : Lucky numbers . How long could a pearl diver stay underwater? Now, How long can a diver stay underwater? Play a game in groups . LN When did Jacques Couteau die? When did he invent the deep sea diving vessel ? LN What could he study ? How can we explore the oceans now ? Have Ss work in groups . Ask Ss to complete the passage with the modal verbs in the box . - Complete the passage . Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Exchange the results with the Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of partners ..

(213) the class . - Give the answers . - Correct the mistakes . 3. Post – reading :10 min - Have Ss talk about inventions . - Give some cues : - Talk about the inventions . - Inventions : + Special breathing equipment . Explore the oceans . Learn about the sea EX: Before special breathing equipment we couldn’t explore the oceans , we couldn’t learn about the sea …….. + Electricity : Read all nights Watch TV Use computers Listen to music  Before electricity , we couldn’t …….. + The motorbikes : Travel far . Get home quickly . Visit places  Before motorbike, we couldn’t ……… - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give the results in front - Work in groups . of the class . - Give the results in front of the - Remark . class . III.Consolidation: 3 min - Retell the vocabulary and main structures of this lesson. - Listen and remember. III.Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Do exercise 5 at page 86 in workbook . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN. I. Aims: - Talk about freetime activitives. - Make suggestions..

(214) - Make inquires about and express preferences. - Talk about TV and TV programs. 1.Vocablary: in each period 2.Structures: - Like /prefer + to + inf/ - Like + gerund 3.Skills: Listening, speaking,reading,writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about freetime activitives and talk about TV and TV programs.then they can make inquires about and express preferences. + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen for details to choose the best answer , listen and write the time . + Reading: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read and complete the summary or answer the questions + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write to complete the passage . II. Teaching methods - Communicative, realia, substitution table … III. Teaching aids - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … IV. Anticipated problem: like ..................better than/ more than = prefer ................to V. Procedures - From period 84 th to 88th -Lesson 1:A1 -Lesson 2:A2 -Lesson 3: A3,4+Remember -Lesson 4:B1+B2 -Lesson 5:B3,4+Remember Ngày soạn: 24/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 29/3/2016 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Period 84 : Lesson 1 : A – Time for TV ( A1 ) A.Objectives : After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , The activities in freetime such as watching TV , playing chess….. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa . 1.Vocabulary : - Series - Adventure - Cricket - To sound - to prefer - To guess 2.Grammar : Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t …… B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures ….

(215) C.Procedure: Teacher’s Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Chatting with Ss about their freetime by some questions : - What do you usually do in your freetime ? - Do you like watching TV? - Do you like watching news in English? - What programs on TV do you like watching? - What is your favorite program? - How much time do you spend watchingTV a day ? Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson: 1. Presentation :15 min - Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce : This is the picture of Hoa’s family . Look at it and guess what they do in their freetime ? do they watch TV? - Introduce the situation : Watching TV is one of the most popular activities in freetime . We are going to listen to a dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do Lan’s / Hoa’s family do in their freetime ? - Explain some new words to Ss . + Series ( n ) : + Adventure ( n ) + Cricket ( n ) + To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better … + To sound ( v ) + To guess ( v ) = to predict - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have them play a game : what and where . - Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa usually do in the evening . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . 2. Practice :20 min - Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions .. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer the questions .. - Look at the picture and listen .. - Listen to the teacher .. - Listen and write down .. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .. - Play a game . - Guess what Lan and Hoa do in the evening . - Give the predictions . - Look at the books , listen to.

(216) - Call on some Ss to give the answers .. the tape and check the predictions. - Give the answer : Hoa usually talks about her day, then she reads and sometimes she plays chess . Lan usually watches TV. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Do exercise . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers .. - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best answers . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the key : a) Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family . b) Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner . c) Hoa’s family doesn’t have a TV because her aunt and uncle don’t like watching TV. d) Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle at night . e) Lan’s family always watches TV in the evening - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . III.Consolidation: 3min - Write down. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Some pairs practice in front IV.Homework :2 min of the class . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook . - Prepare part A2 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 25/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 30/3/2016 WEEK 30 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Period 85 :Lesson 2 : A – Time for TV ( A2 ).

(217) A.Objectives : The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure “ Would you like to ………?” question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program . Practice speaking skill. 1.Vocabulary : - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement 2.Grammar : Review : would you like to + V ? B.Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’Activities I.Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . - Play a game . Theater Adventure. News. Concer t. Series. Each group has 3 students to take part in the game.. Movie. - Teacher reads in Vietnamese , Ss slap in English. - State the group which wins the game . - Remark and lead in new lesson . II.New lesson: 1.Presentation :15 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape . - Explain some new words : + Cowboy movie ( n ) + Detective movie ( n ) + Pop concert ( n ) + Classical concert ( n ) + Drama ( n ) + Advertisement ( n ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation .. Clap the hands .. - Listen . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Listen and write down .. - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down ..

(218) - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue .. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice reading in front of the class . class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Explain the model sentences : - Listen carefully . What would you like to watch / see? I’d like to watch / see a cowboy movie . 2.Practice :18 min - Ask Ss to look at the advertisements , make - Look at the advertisements and up similar dialogues . make up similar dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class. class . S1: Would you like to go to the - Correct the mistakes if necessary . concert this week ? S2: That sounds good . What would you like to see? S1: There is a classical concert on at Hanoi opera House. S2: Ok. Can you make it on Tuesday night ? S1: Sorry , I have to go to E club . S2: ……… III.Consolidation :5 min - Look at the mapped dialogue . - Give a mapped dialogue : Hoa ………………….Lan Would ……theater? ….good . What would you ………..? ….easy life ……. youth theater . Ok …….Tuesday night? Sorry ….E club . How….Thursday? Ok . Fine, let’s ……… - Work in pairs . - Have Ss work in pairs using mapped dialogue . - Practice in front of the class . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class . - Correct the mistake. - Listen and remember. - Remark the main content of the lesson IV.Homework :2 min - Write homework ..

(219) Theate r. News. Series. - Learn by heart new words . - Make a dialogue in the notebook . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK 31 Ngày soạn: 26/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 04/4/2016 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Period 86: Lesson 3 : A – Time for TV ( A3 ,4,remember ) A.Objectives : After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty years ago and today . Practice reading skill . 1. Vocabulary : - Owner - To change - To gather - Might 2. Grammar : Review the simple present tense and past simple tense . B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I. Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Hangman 3 words : Watch – television – living room - Have Ss guess the words . - Remark and lead in new lesson . II. New lesson : A3 . Read : TV in Viet Nam : 20 min - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about them . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . + Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV . + To gather ( v ) : + To change ( v ) : + Might ( modal verb ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game . All class take part in the game .. - Look at the pictures and say about them . - Listen and write . - Read new words in chorus and individually ..

(220) individually . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : what and where . - Ask Ss to do an exercise : True or False prediction. 1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people had TV sets . 2) These TV owners were very popular . 3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs in the evening . 4) Now , they don’t spend much time together . 5) A few people have TV sets today . - Have Ss do exercise in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask the rest groups to exchange the results . - Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5.F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . - Give some answers and ask students to find out the questions . 1) No, very few people . 2) The black and white programs . 3) They might sleep a little . 4) No. no one . 5) In their own living room . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and ask students to write down . * Now complete the summary : 10 min - Ask students to read the passage again then find the words to complete the summary . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the answer key :. - Play a game .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Exchange the result.. - Give the answers .. - Some students read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again and find the questions for the answers .. - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class .. - Read the passage again and complete the summary . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answer in front of the class ..

(221) 1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular 5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today 9. have 10. life 11. know - Call on some students to read the summary aloud . B. Play with words : 5 min - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : what is she doing ? - Play the tape for students . - Ask students to look at the books and read after the tape . - Call on some students to read aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . III. Consolidation :3 min - Have students work in groups discussing the advantanges and disadvantanges of TV . - Call on some groups to present their ideas . - Correct if necessary . IV. Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook . - Prepare part B1,2 .. - Read the summary aloud . - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen to the tape . - Look at the book and read after the tape . - Read aloud .. - Work in groups . - Give the ideas in front of the class . - Write homework .. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 27/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 05/4/2016 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Period 87 : Lesson 4 : B – What’s on ? ( B1,2 ) A.Objectives: The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV . 1. Vocabulary : - Sports show - Children’s program - Early news - Weather forecast - The world today - A first ful of dollars’ 2. Grammar : What kinds of programs do you like ? B. Teaching aids : - text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures ….

(222) C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I. Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have students play a game : Jumbled words . + RGMAPOR + NEATERGE + SUMIC + VOMEI + REHATTE + ODARI - Call on 2 students to go to the board and write down . - Remark and give marks . II. New lesson : A. Listen . Then practice with a partner: 20 min - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question: What’s on TV ? - Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then ask students to guess what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba likes. - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Have students look at the book and listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on 3or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer : - Ask students to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a. No’ she doesn’t because there aren’t many good programs for teenagers . b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and movies . c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game . + Program + Teenager + Music + Movie + Theater + Radio - Go to the board and write .. - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen and guess .. - Give the prediction . - Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Read the dialogue again to find the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class..

(223) other countries . d. Because they don’t play the kind of music she likes . e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book . - Ask students to write in the notebooks . - Write in the notebook . B. Listen. write the times of the programs : 15 min - Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 . - Look at the programs in the book . - Ask them to predict the times of these programs . - Predict the time of the programs . - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Give the prediction in front of - Ask them to listen to the tape and check their the class . prediction. - Listen to the tape . - Play the tape again for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front - Give the answers. of the class . - Have students listen to the tape again and check - Listen to the tape and check the the answers . answers . - Correct and give the answer key : a. Children’s programs : 5:oo b. Early News : 6:oo c. Weather forecast : 6:10 d. The world Today : 6: 15 e. Movie : “ A firstful of dollars” : 7:oo - Have students write the answers in the notebooks . - Write in the notebooks . III. Consolidation :3 min - Give some cues then ask students to practice - Write . asking and answering : + Morning News + Teenagers. + The world of animals . + Music programs . - Have students work in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . IV. Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words . - Write homework . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in workbook . - Prepare part 3,4 ..

(224) * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 28/3/2016 Ngày dạy: 06/04/2016 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Period 88: Lesson 5 : B- What’s on ? ( B3,4,Remember) A.Objectives : After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to know some more vocabulary about TV programs . 1. Vocabulary : - Audience - To contest - Artist - Contestant - To perform - Folk music - Imports - To include - Satellite - Cable TV 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense . B. Teaching aids : Textbook, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I. Warm up :5 min - Greetings . - Have students play a game : Noughts and Crosses Early News The world Weather today forecast Cartoons. Sports shows. Movies. Teenagers. Music. News in English. Students’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. All class take part in the game .. EX: What kind of programs do you like? I like to watch Early News . - Have students play in 2 groups . - Play game in 2 groups . - State the group which wins the game. II. New lesson : A. Listen and read . Then answer the.

(225) questions :18 min. - Ask students to look at the three pictures and identify them . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words : + Audience : The person who watches the shows . + Artist ( n ) : A famous singer . + To perform ( v ) : + To contest ( v ) = To compete + Contestant ( n ) = Competitor + Folk music ( n ) : + Imports ( n ) = foreign series . + To include ( v ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Check new words by playing a game called rub out and remember . - Have students do an exercise : T or F prediction . 1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV programs . 2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music . 3. There are contests of knowledge . 4. The contestants are students , workers , TV viewers . 5. Imports are very expensive . - Have students work in groups in 2 minutes . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask students to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F Have students read the passage aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask students to work in pairs asking and asnwering the questions in the books . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct. - Look at three pictures and identify them . - Listen and write .. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .. - Play a game . _ Do an exercise .. - Work in groups . - give the prediction . Listen to the tape and check . - Give the answers in front of the class. - Read the passage aloud . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class ..

(226) answers . a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists . b. They are students , workers or family members . c. Imports usually include police and hospitals . d. Students’ answer. B. Write. Complete the passage . Use the words in the box .15 min - Ask students to look at the words in the box and read them aloud . - Explain some new words to students . + To be possible : the same meaning with Can. + Satellite ( n ) : + Cable TV ( n ) : - Have students complete the passage , using the words in the box . - Ask students to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the results in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen 4. Series 5. Show 6. Like 7. Station 8. Receive 9. Cities 10 . Possible - Ask 2 students to read the passage aloud . III. Consolidation :5 min - Have students take a survey : Ex: S1: Do you want to hear pop music ? S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t . Or : S1: What TV programs do you want to see? S2: I want to see the contests . _ Have students work in groups . ( Each group has a secretary ) IV. Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook . - Review for doing a test in the next lesson .. - Read the words in the box . - Listen and write .. - Complete the passage . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the results in front of the class .. - Read the completed passage aloud . - Take a survey .. - Listen .. - Work in groups .. - Write homework ..

(227) * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK 32 Ngày soạn: 04/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 11/4/2016 Period 89: WRITTEN TESt( 45 minutes ) A. Objectives: The students will know how to apply their knowledge to do the test well, from the test the teacher will know each student and class’s knowledge and have the method to teach. B. Teaching aids : - Teacher : prepare a written test - Students: Review C/The content of the test. I. Ma trËn :. Chủ đề. NhËn biÕt KQ TL. I. Listening. Th«ng hiÓu KQ TL 4. VËn dông KQ TL. Tæng 4. 2.0 II. Reading. 2. 2.0 2. 1.0 III. Language. 8. 1.0. 8. focus IV.Writing Tæng. 4. 2.0. 2.0. 4,0 4. 8. 8 2.0. 2.0 16. 6 2.0. 4 2.0. 2.0 28. 4.0. 10. 6 3.0. II. Test : I. Choose the correct answers . 1. I can’t go out for a walk now . I ………..my homework . A. must do B. must to do C. must doing 2. My father is a …………football player . A. skill B. skillful C. skillfully 3. Would you like to go to the movies to night ?...................... A. Yes , I do B. Yes, I like C. I’d love to 4. ………………do you like ?.

(228) A. What of programs B. What kinds of programs C. What of kinds programs 5. In 1960s , ……….. in Vietnam didn’t have a TV set . A. most of people B. most people C. most of the people 6. I ought to finish my homework before I………..table tennis . A. will play B. play C. am playing 7. Playing chess after dinner sounds …………..to me . A. boring B. bored C. boringly 8. We’ ll take a walk instead ………riding a bicycle. A. of B. for C. with II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets . 1. I’d like ( tell ) ……………you something about myself . 2. Children should ( spend )……………only a small part of their freetime ( play ) …. …………….video games . 3. She ( not like ) ……………..riding . She ( prefer )……………..walking . 4. Nam prefers ( take )……………part in sports to ( watch )………………them. 5. Lan usually ( watch )…………….TV in the evening . III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions . Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ? Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ? Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater . Nam : What movie is it ? Ba : It’s a detective movie . Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then . Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about tomorrow evening ? Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ? Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater . 1. What would Ba like to see ? ………………………………………………… 2. Will Ba and Nam go to the theater tonight ? …………………………………………………… 3. What is Nam going to do tomorrow evening ? ……………………………………………………… 4. Where will they meet ? ……………………………………………………… IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. Nam is a good table tennis player . => Nam plays …………………………………………….. 2. Why don’t we go to the amusement center ? => What about …………………………………………? 3. He likes playing soccer better than watching TV . => He prefers ………………………………………..

(229) 4. You should stay inside at recess . => I advise ………………………………………. V. Listen . Then check True or False in the boxes . Statements T F 1. Nga , Lan and Long didn’t go to their English class yesterday. 2. Nga didn’t stay at home . She visited her grandmother . 3. Lan ate out in a restaurant with her friends . 4. Long watched TV and listened to music . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 6/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 12/4/2016 Period 90 :Correcting the written test A.Objectives : After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English. B. Teaching aids : Test papers, chalk, board. C. Procedure: 1. Warm up : - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions . 2. Correcting the test: a) Remark the good and bad of the test and correct common mistakes. b) Deliver the test papers and give the correct answers: I. Choose the best answer . 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B 5. B 6. B 7. A 8. A II . Supply the correct forms of the verbs . 1. To tell 2. Spend - playing 3. doesn’t like – prefers 4. taking - watching 5. watches III. Answer the questions . 1. He would like to see a movie . 2. No, they won’t . 3. He is going to visit his grandmother . 4. They will meet in front of the theater . IV. Rewrite these sentences . 1. Nam plays table tennis well . 2. What about going to the amusement center ? 3. He prefers playing soccer to watching TV ..

(230) 4. I advise you to stay inside at recess . V. Listen . 1.T 2. F 3. T 4. F Tape : Yesterday was Sunday . Nga , Lan and Long did not go to their English class . They did different things last night . Nga stayed at home . She watched TV and played chess with her grandmother . Lan visited her friendsand ate out in a restaurant with them . Long played video games and listened to pop music . IV. Remark and homework : Prepare unit 15 – A1 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Unit 15 going out I.Aims - After finishing the unit Ss will be able to: + Made advice + Talk about video games and their affects. + talk about the hobbies + Know how relax and spend time on playing video game suitably 1. Knowledge *Vocabulary - amusement center, arcade, premises, identify robbers, VCR, VCD, image, socialize, after all… *Structures Modals Present simple tense Tobe used to + V-ing/ get used + V- ing Prefer Ving to Ving 2.Skills: Listening, speaking,reading,writing + Speaking: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to speak about video games, their affects or the hobbies.then they can give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games + Listening: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to listen for details to choose the best answer , listen and match . + Reading: By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to read and complete the summary or answer the questions + Writing:By the end of the lesson,Ss should be able to write to complete the passage . II. Teaching methods - Communicative, realia, substitution table ,Game , pairwork,groupwork, individual work….. III. Teaching aids.

(231) - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … IV. Anticipated problem: Prefer .............to = like ............. better than V. Procedures From period 91st to 95th -Lesson 1:A1 -Lesson 2: A2,3+Remember -Lesson 3: B1+B2 -Lesson 4: B3 -Lesson 5:B4,5+Remember Ngày soạn: 7/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 13/4/2016 WEEK 32 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Period 91: Lesson 1 : A - Video games ( A1 ) A. Objectives : After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and disadvantages of playing video games . 1. Vocabulary : - Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive 2. Grammar : Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I won’t . B. Teaching aids : - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities I. Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks .. Entertainment s. - Have Ss play game in 2 groups .. Sudents’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. 2 groups take part in the game . Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the board and write down ..

(232) - Remark and lead in new lesson . II. New lesson : 1 .Presentation: 15 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question What can you see in the picture ? - Introduce some new words : + Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can go to play some games for relaxing . + Video games ( n ) : + Arcade ( n ) : + Addictive ( adj ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : what and where . 2. Practice: 20 min - Have students look at the dialogue and listen to the tape . - Ask students to read after the tape . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce the new model sentence : + Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade. => No, I won’t . ( Advise somebody not to do something .) - Ask students to make examples as model . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers . - Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . a. He’s going to the amusement center . b. He’s going to play video games .. - Listen and answer the question .. - Listen and write .. - Read new words . - Play a game . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Listen .. - Make examples as model . - Find the answers for the questions - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - go to the board and write the answers . - Write in the notebooks ..

(233) c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week . d. No, he doesn’t . e. He usually stays for about an hour . f. Because video games can be addictive . g. He will do his homework later . III. Consolidation :3 min - Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to - Look at the mapped dialogue . look at carefully . YOU YOUR FRIEND Where ….going ? Amusement center What …….do?. video games. How often ?. 2/ week. Don’t spend ….. video games …. Don’t forget ……. homework .. - Have students work in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the - Practice in front of the class . class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . IV. Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words and structure by - Write homework . making 2 sentences with each . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... WEEK 33 Ngày soạn: 14/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 18/4/2016 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Period 92 :Lesson 2 : A- Video games ( A 2, 3+remember ) A. Objectives : By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing video games . 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises.

(234) - To develop - Robbery - To identify - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense . B. Teaching aids : - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask students some questions such as : - Answer T’s questions . + Do you like playing video games ? + How often do you play video games ? + How long do you usually spend playing video games? + What do you think about playing video games ? ……………… - Remark and lead in new lesson . II. New lesson : A. Listen and read : 20 min - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask - Listen and do exercise . students to do an exercise : True or False prediction . 1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun . 2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time on their own . 3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired . 4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends . 5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young . - Have students work in groups . - Work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction. - Give the prediction . - Ask students to look at the books and listen to the - Listen to the tape and check tape then check their prediction . the prediction . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T - Have students listen to the tape again and introduce - Listen to the tape again . some new words : + Inventor ( n ) The person who invents videogames.

(235) + Dizzy ( adj ) : + To develop ( v ) : + Social skill ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Ask students to read the text in silent . - call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer , complete the sentences . - Have students read the text again to find out the answers . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a) Many young people play video games . b) Some inventors of video games become very rich . c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends . d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games . - Have students write in the notebooks . B. Complete the passage with the words in the box : 15 min - Explain the request of the exercise then introduce some new words . + To identify ( v ) : + Premises ( n ) : + Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n ) + Industry ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students complete the passage . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Correct and give the key : 1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are 6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show - Call on 2 students to read the completed passage. - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Read the passage in silent . - Read aloud .. - Read the passage again to find the answers . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers .. - Write down .. - Listen and write .. - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Complete the passage . - Exchange the results . - Give the answers .. - Read aloud ..

(236) aloud - Ask students to write down . - Write . III. Consolidation :3 min - Have students work in groups discussing about the - Work in groups . disadvantages of playing video games . - Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in - Demonstrate the ideas . front of the class . Play outdoors Stay up too late. Spend much money on video games Play video games too much. Take part in out doors activities Be with people with our age. Spend little Study hard Spend too much playing video time on our own - Remark IV. Homework :2 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Do exercise 3,4 in workbook . - Prepare the next lesson . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ Ngày soạn: 14/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 19/4/2016 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Period 93: Lesson 3 : B - In the city ( B1,2 ) A. Objectives : After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing . 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense . B. Teaching aids : - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about the city and the country … C.Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities.

(237) I. Warm up :7 min - Greetings . - Have students play a game : Wordsquare . H R O B H G I E N O C L U B Z W S C O Z K S J V Q I E D R S Y M N T O G M Z J R K Y T N A O P C O Q Z E J L T T R A F F I C L O X L D R N U B I R B I K E S Q K V - Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and country . - Have students work in groups . -Remark and lead in new lesson . II. New lesson: 1. Presentation : 18 min - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question. What is the picture about ? - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Why / why not ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country . - Play the tape for students . - Have students give the answers . - Introduce some new words to students : + The rest ( n ) : + Awake ( adj ) : + To scare ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N . + Direction ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : rub out and remember . - Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country .. - Greetings . - Play a game .. Discuss in groups to find the words which relate to the city and the country . - Work in groups . - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Answer T’s questions .. - Listen . - Look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the questions . - Give the answers . - Listen and write .. - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Play a game . - Discuss about life in the city and life in the country ..

(238) * Brainstorming : Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic ………… ………….. - Have students work in groups . - Work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their ideas . - Give the ideas . 2 .Practice : 15 min - Have students read the dialogue in pairs . - Work in pairs reading the - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in dialogue . front of the class . - Practice reading the dialogue in - Correct the pronunciation . front of the class . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and - Find the answers . find the answers for the questions . - Have students play a game : Lucky numbers - Play a game in 2 groups . (7) 1. Where did Hoa live before ? 2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ? 3. LN . 4. What does Hoa do in the evening ? 5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ? 6. Does She like the city ? 7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue? - Remark and ask students to write the answers - Write the answers in the in the notebooks . notebooks . III. Consolidation : 3 min - Ask students to use the questions in part B2 - Discuss about life in the city and to work in pairs discussing about life in the in the country . city and life in the country . - Have students work in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the - Practice in front of the class . class . - Correct and remark. IV. Homework : 2min - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines - Write homework . for each - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books . - Prepare part B3 . * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 15/4/2016.

(239) Ngày dạy: 20/4/2016 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Period 94 :Lesson 5 : B – In the city ( B 3 ) A. Objectives : After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills . 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund B. Teaching aids : - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I. Warm up : 5 min - Greetings . - Greetings . - Have students play a game : Networks - Play a game .. City. - Have students work in groups . - Have students go to the board and write . - Remark . II. New lesson : B3. Read : 35 min - Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa got used to the city life . - Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do . - Have students read the text in silent . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Call on some students to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . - Introduce new words : + Rarely ( adv ) : + To socialize ( v ) : + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive. - Work in groups . - Go to the board and write .. - Listen . - Read the text and find out what she could do . - Read in silent . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Read the text aloud . - Listen and write ..

(240) Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her friends . Like / prefer + gerund . Ex: Hoa like playing chess very much . - Ask students to make sentences as model . - Give some more questions and ask students to answer : a) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ? b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening ? c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ? d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ? - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . - Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present tense . - Have students exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class . - Call one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks III. Consolidation : 3 min - Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in B4 to talk about what they like to do or dislike to do . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . IV. Homework : 2 min - Write the things that you often do in the evening .. - Make sentences . - Answer the questions .. - Work in pairs . - Ask and answer in front of the class . - Make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening . - Exchange the results . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Go to the board and write . - Write in the notebooks .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Write homework ..

(241) - Do exercises in part B in workbook . - Prepare unit 15 –B4,5. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Week 34 Ngày soạn: 21/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 25/4/2016 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Period 95:Lesson 5 : B – In the city ( B 4,5 +Remeber ) A. Objectives : After the lesson students will know how to talk about the activities that they could do in the evening . They practice listening skills . 1. Vocabulary : review. 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . B. Teaching aids : - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C. Procedure : Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities I.English test: 15 min Complete each sentence so that the meaning stays the same: - do the test in to the paper. 1. She is not a quick runner. -> She does ………………. 2. What is the matter with Minh? -> What is…………………….. 3. My father is a careful driver. -> My father drives…………… 4. I like video games better than computer games. -> I prefer……………………………… 5. Let's go to the amusement center. -> Why don't………………………….. 6. Reading is more boring than watching TV. -> Watching TV is more……………………… 7. How high is that building? -> What……………………. 8. No one can swim more quickly than him. -> He is…………………………. 9. Basketball is my favorite sport. -> The sport………………………. 10. Mai forgets to do the homework and I did, too..

(242) -> Mai didn't……………………………. II.New lesson : B4. Listen . Match each name to an activity : 18 min *Pre- listening: - Introduce the aim of the listening . - Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of each picture . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures . - play chess. - Play table tennis - Listen to music - see a movie. - watch a soccer match. - Go to the restaurant These are 6 activities that Ba, Hoa, Nga, Nam, Lan and An did yesterday evening. Now you listen to the tape and match each name to an activity *While- listening: - Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Play the tape for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key : Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e * Post- listening: Have students talk about you by asking the questions: - What did you do yesterday evening? - Where do you live? - Do you like the city? - Why do you like the city? - Why don’t you like the countryside? I don’t like the countryside because it is boring. It has a few entertainment. I prefer the city to the countryside.. - Listen to the teacher . - Give the activity of each picture .. - Guess and write the names next to the pictures .. Look at these pictures and talk about them.. - Listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Listen. - Give the answers in front of the class .. - Check the answers . - copy down -Practice in front of the class. -Talk about you. By students. -Others listen to and give the comments. -The city has only a little traffic, and it has it has a lot of.

(243) - Write the advantages and advantages in the city noise. But I will get used to it soon. and in the countryside B5. Play with words: 3 min - listen and repeat. - Play the tape part B5 . Ask ss to listen and repeat ( twice) - read out individually. - Call on some ss to read out before the class. - listen and correct. - Remark and correct. III. Consolidation :2 min - Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do . - Work in pairs . - Have students work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . IV. Homework :2 min - Write homework . - Write the things that you often do in the evening . - Do exercises in part B in workbook . - Prepare unit 15 –B4,5. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... Unit 16 people and places Aims: - After finishing the unit ss will be able to + Talk about the famous places in Asia, their own interests, destinations, famous people and events in the history + Have more love to nature, Ss are more proud of their country 1. Knowledge: *Vocabulary Names of some countries and capital cities in Asia: Thailand, Singapore, Bangkok, kuala Lumpur Words to talk about some famous places/ people in Asia aor welknown scientists in the world: Angkor wat, Thomas Edison, Andersen, famous, attractive, well - known *Structures Frequency adverbs Modal verb Past simple tense 2. Skills: Drill 4 skills II. Teaching methods - Pairworks, groupworks games I..

(244) III. Teaching aids - Textbook, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about famous places and people… IV. Anticipated problem: used to + Vo/tobe used to/ get used to +Ving V. Procedures From period 96th to 100th -Lesson 1:A1,2 -Lesson 2: A3,4+Remember -Lesson 3: B1 -Lesson 4: B2,3 -Lesson 5:B4,5+Remember Ngày soạn: 15/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 22/4/2016 Unit 16: people and places Period 96: Lesson 1 : A - Famous places in Asia (a1,2) A.Objectives - After finishing the lesson Ss will be able to + Know the fous places in Asia + Complete the table the country and its capital 1. Vocablary Name of the countries and capitals in English 2. Structures B. Teaching aids : - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C. Procedure : Teacher’s activites Students’ activities I. Warm up : 5 min Let Ss play network game + Play game about the country II. New lesson: A1.Listen then practice with a partner: 20 min + Listen to the teacher + Ask Ss to look ate the picture of part 1 + Explain the line in the post card. + In Thailand + Where is Bangkok? + What do you know about Thailand? + Beside Thailand, Whih countries and their Malaysia , laos … capitals in south east Asia do you know? + Introduce to lead to the new lesson + Listen to the teacher + Open the tape + Listen to the tape + Ask Ss to listen and find the places + Open the tape again ask ss to listen and + Listen and repeat repeat. + Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs + Practice in pairs + call on some pairs to practice + Practice in class + ask Ss to read the dialogue again and + Read again and do exercise match the half- sentences.

(245) + Call on ss to read the answers. + Give correct answers D Ba’s uncle is a pilot F Uncle Nghia sends postcards to Ba from the cities he visits Ba keeps the postcards as well as the stamps C Ba puts the stamps in a special book A Hoa wants to see the stamps E Ba and Hoa would like to visit many different places A2.Complete the table. Use the names of the countries in the box.(15 min) Ask Ss to match the name to the country in the box. Give some more countries Cambodia Myanmar Indonesia Malaysia China Laos + Ask Ss to compare with their partners + call on Ss to go to the board and write + give correct answer Capital Country Bangkok Thailand Beijing China Kuala Lumpur Malaysia Phnom Penh Cambodia Vientian Laos Yangon Myanma Jakarta Indonesia + Ask Ss to listen and repeat the names of the country and capitals + Call on Ss to repeat + Ask Ss to practice in pairs ask and answer base the part 1 + Call on 1 S to practice with teacher as model Where does Ba’s uncle fly to? He usually flies to Bangkok. Where is that It is in Thailand. + Call some pairs practice in class. + Correct pronunciation III.Consolidation : 3 min. + read the answer. Copy the correct answer. + Listen and repeat and copy. + Compare with their partner + Go to the board and complete the able. + Listen and repeat. + Practice with the teacher.

(246) - retell the names and the capital of the countries IV.Homework : 2 min Write the names of 10 countries and their capitals. - listen and remember. - Write down. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 16/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 23/4/2016 Unit 16: people and places period 97: Lesson 2 : A - Famous places in Asia (a3,4+ remember) A.Objectives - To help Sts read a text about the interests with modal verb : “ May”. - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice reading comprehension and know how to use : “ May”. 1. Vocabulary - attraction (n) ancient monument (n) resort, culture, admire, shadow puppet show 2. Strutures :Modal verbs : may B. Teaching aids - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C. Procedures: Teacher’s activities I.Warm up: 5 min - Ask ss to play a game : Matching Capital Country Bangkok Malaysia Beijing Myanma Kuala Lumpur Thailand Phnom Penh Indonesia Vientian China Yangon Cambodia Jakarta Laos + divide class in to 2 groups. - Remark the result of each group. Then ask ss to read these words again. II. New lesson: 1. Listening: A3- 15 min - Teacher gives instruction. - Ask Students to listen carefully to complete the table with the correct place names. - Play the tape. (3 Times).. Students’ activities - Play this game with 2 groups. - listen and read them again.. - Listen to the Teacher. - Listen to the tape and fill the correct place names in the table individually then pair compare..

(247) + Check with the partner. * Answer keys: - Monday – BangKok and Singapore. - Tuesday – Singapore. - Wednesday – Jakartar. - Thursday – Bali. - Friday – Bali. - Saturday – HongKong. - Sunday – Back to Hanoi. 2. Reading : A4 - 20 min a. Pre teach vocab: Elicit from Students. - attraction (n): (explain) - ancient monument (n): - a resort: - culture (n): - admire (v): - shadow puppet show: - coral(n): (picture) * Check vocab: What and where. b. Reading a. Pre questions: - Teacher gives instruction: Ask Ss to find out the answer to the pre question in pairs. - Why do tourists like to visit South East Asia? - Collect students’ ideas. b. While reading: *. Check their prediction. - Ask Sts to read the text and check their predictionindividually then pair compare. - Get feed back from Sts. *. Comprehension questions: - Get Sts to read the text and practice asking and answering the questions.in pairs. Answer keys: a. The 3 kinds of tourists attractions mentioned in the passage are: ancient monuments, shows and resort . b. According to the sts’ opinion. * Activities. a.You can swim and dive. b. You may visit the Khmer Temples of AngKor Wat. c. You can see colorful dancer or shadow puppet shows.. - Give the answers.. - Listen and repeat then copy.. - Play in two groups. - Listen to the teacher and then pair work. - Give the answers.. - Read and check their prediction Individually then pair compare. - Give the answers. - Pairwork. - Give the answers.

(248) d. You may admire colorful corals and fish. e. You can listen to and enjoy traditional misic during the performances. f. You can sail and enjoy a healthy outdoor life. III. Consolidation: 3 min - Ask ss to read the part : remember - Retell the important points of the lesson. IV. Homework: 2 min - Learn by heart the new words. - Practice speaking E with your friends. - Rewrite the activities. - Prepare the new lesson: B1 (P.157).. - copy down - read and remember - Listen to the teacher. - Listen and write down.. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ....................................................................................................................................... Week 35 Ngày soạn: 25/4/2016 Ngày dạy: 02/5/2016 Unit 16: People and places period 98:lesson 3- B: Famous people (b1) A.Objectives - After finishing the lesson Ss will be able to + Know about the famous people of Viet Nam as well as of the world + Know more about the history of our country 1. Vocabulary - quiz, Generral Commander- In – chief, defeat 2. Structures B.Teaching aids - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures … C.Procedures Teacher’s activities Students’ activities I. Warm up: 5 min - Play a game : Networks - Play in two groups. Famous people..

(249) Uncle Ho - Remark the result of each group. Then lead in the new lesson. II. New lesson. 1.Presentation(15') - Introduce the new words: Elicit from Ss. - a quiz (n): - a battle (n): - the general (n) - lead (v): - defeat (v): - forces (n): - be famous for (a): * Check up: Slap the board. +T/ F statement prediction: B1 - T. gives instruction. - T. asks sts to predict individually then pair compare. * Collect Ss’ ideas. 2. Practice : 20 min - Play the tape (3 times) and ask sts to listen and check their prediction individually then compare. + Check with the Wc. * Keys: a. F d. F b. F e. T c. T f. F + Ask Ss to work in pairs to practice the dialogue. + Call on some pairs to practice in class. + Feedback pronunciation III. Consolidation: 3 min - Retell the important points of the lesson: Famous people. IV. Homework: 2 min - Learn by heart the new words - Practise speaking English Do exercises,repare the new lesson B2, 3. - listen to the teacher.. - Listen and repeat then copy.. - Play in two groups. - Listen to the T. - Individual predict then pair compare. - Listen and check their prediction. - Give the answers.. - Practice in pairs - Practice in class - Listen to the teacher - Listen and copy. * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... Ngày soạn: 26/5/2016.

(250) Ngày dạy: 03/5/2016 Unit 16: People and places period 99:lesson 4- B: Famous people (b2,3) A.Objectives - After finishing the lesson Ss will be able to + Make a similar dialogue + Know about Dien Bien Phu 1. Vocabulary:- handsome, gentle, battle, hospitality, tourism,… 2. Structures- Present simple tense- Past simple tense B. Teaching aids - Text book, cassettes, tape, computer, OHP, pictures about DBP and famous players. C. Procedures Teacher’s activities I. Warm up: 5 min - Teacher asks ss to talk about General Vo Nguyen Giap, using the cues form -Name: Vo Nguyen Giap - year of birth: 1911 - Job: General/ Commander in –chief - Famous for: leading the people’s Army of Viet nam - The battle: Dien Bien Phu - giving feedback & corrections II. New lesson: 1. B2 - Practice:25 min - Give Ss some pictures about famous players + Ask ss “Do you like these players? Why? Do you know anything about them?” + Give introduction and ask Ss to fill in the gap to complete the dialogue between Lan and Hoa + hang on the dialogue Hoa: Do you ____ Mario? Lan: No, not very much. I ____ Pele. H: Why? L: Because Pele is a better player than Romario. H: I ____ so. L: What about you? H: My ____ player is Micheal Jordan. L: Really? H: Yes. I think he’s very fast. + Call on Ss to read the answer Like, prefer, guess, favorite. Students’ activities - group work.. - Look at the pictures - answer the questions - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the board and fill in the gap. - Read the answer..

(251) + Ask Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs. b/ Now make your own dialogues about famous people you know. The adjectives in the box will help you. EX: A: Do you like My Tam ? B: No, not very much. I prefer My Linh. A: Why do you prefer My Linh ? B: Because she sings better than My Tam. * T asks ss : + Does Lan like Romario? + Who does she prefer? Why? + Who is Hoa’s favorite player ? + Who is your favorite singer? - Sts practise the exercise in pairs - Corrections * Find someone who . name Swim Tuan Play the guitar Cook Speak English Use a computer 2.Write it up: B3 (P159) - 10 min - Get Sts to read the text B3 (P.159) and write it up in groups. - What can people visit Dien Bien Phu? - What else can tourists do in Dien Bien Phu? - Why is Dien Bien Phu’s location important? * Get some Sts to read out. + People can visit the battle site in Dien Bien Phu. + tourists can also enjoy the beautiful scenery of the Muong Thanh valley, visit the neighboring villages and share the hospitality of the local people III.Consolidation: 3 min - Sumarize the content of the lesson IV. Homework: 2 min + Do exercise 2, 3 of workbook + Prepare for the next lesson. - Practice completed dialogue - Make the dialogues similarly. - answer the questions. - Practice in pairs - Correction.. Practice in pairs. - Work in group. - read the answers. - Listen to the teacher. - Write down.

(252) * Comments: ............................................................................................................ .......... ............................................................................ ................................................ ...................................................................................................................................... TUẦN 36 Ngày soạn: 03/5/2016 Ngày dạy: 09/5/2016 Unit 16: people and places. period 100:B: Famous people - lesson 5( b4, 5+ Re) I Objectives - By the end of the lesson, ss may know some more information about uncle Ho. - Through this lesson the students can be able to know something about famous people over the world, Students can know something about the history in Vietnam. - Skills: reading, speaking, listening and writing. 1. Vocabulary - invention /n/: - electric light bulb /n - establish /v - gramophone /n/: - author /n/: - grow up /v/: - actor /n/: - education /n/: 2. Structures - Past simple tense II. Teaching aids - Textbook, poster, cassette, tape, sub-board III> Procedures: 1/ Warm up: *Answer the questions: - Answer Qs - Do you know Thomas Edison ? - Who is Christian Andersen ? 2/ Presentation Pre- reading: *Pre- teach: - invention /n/: Explanation - electric light bulb /n/: Realia - Listen and repeat then copy. - establish /v/: Explanation - gramophone /n/: Explanation - author /n/: Situation - grow up /v/: Situation - actor /n/: Example - education /n/: Explanation  Checking: R & R *Pre- reading: T/F statements - Guessing 1/ Thomas Edison was an inventor 2/ Hans Christian Andersen was a Danish author 3/ Thomas Edison established the second central.

(253) power station in New York City 4/ Hans Christian Andersen grew up in a ricfamily 5/ Hans Christian Andersen became most famous for the fairy tales. While- reading: - Teacher read the text in textbook - Ask ss to listen and read in silence to get some information. - Have ss read individually and check their prediction Keys: 1.T; 2.T; 3.F; 4.F; 5.T - Ask ss to answer Qs 1) When was Thomas Edison born? 2) When did he die? 3) How many things did he invent? 4) When was Hans Christian Andersen born? 5) When did he die? 6) Did he write novels, plays, poetry and travel books? - Correct their mistakes - Teacher holds class to play the game a/ One of you is student A and the other is student B. Student A: a newspaper reporter Student B: Mr Edison Eg: P1: When were you born, Mr Edison ? P2: I was born in 1847 b/Then change role - Teacher guides students to practice in pairs - Teacher corrects if they get mistakes. Post – reading: A: _______________________? B : I was born in …… A:_________________________? B: Yes, I was. pre - istening: Now in groups you guess to fill in the blanks with the inf about Uncle Ho. * While-listening: Keys: Ss lisen and correct the inf about Uncle Ho Year Place Date of birth 1890 Kim Lien Left VietNam 1911 Sai gon Work in hotel 1900s Paris Went to another. - Reading individually - Read & check - Answer the Qs. - Play game( pair work). - Correcting. - Practice in pairs + Work in groups. + Listen to the tape and fill.

(254) country Moved again 1923 Founded 1930 Vietnamese communist Party. Moscow Guangzho u. Formed Viet Minh Front Became President. 1940. Vietnam. 1946. Died. 1969. D. Ha noi Ha noi. Post-listening: * Ask and answer about Uncle Ho A:When did Uncle Ho work in the hotel? B: ….. 3. Production - Sumarize the knowledge of the lesson 4. Homework + Do exercise 5 of workbook + Prepare for the next lesson. + Ask and answer.. write down. Ngày soạn: 04/5/2016 Ngày dạy: 10 /5/2016 period 101: Language focus 5 I. Objectives -Further practice in adjs & advs, modal verbs, expressing ideas -By the end of the lesson students will be able to II. Teaching aids Textbook, poster, cassette, tape, sub-board III. Procedures Teacher’s activities 1. Warm –up 2. Presentation In groups you check the correct column about the name of the words -1_P162 Keys: ADJECTIVE ADVERB Slowly X Skillfully X. Students’ activities - Do individually. - Corection..

(255) Good X Bad X Quickly X Dangerous X II/ New lesson: 1/ COMPLETE THE SENT._P162 (b) Keys: a.quick; b.slowly; c.good; d.dangerous; e.skillful 2/ MODELS_P162-164 In pairs you practice reading the dialog_P162 S1 plays Ba  S2 plays Mom -b_P163 Keys: a.play / practice b.play / tidy c.go / mail d.watch / go e.go / tidy Using the inf above and make up the similar dialog S1  S2 FEEL ADVICE 1/ sick a/ put on a hat 2/ hot b/ go to the doctor 3/ cold c/ relax 4/ tired d/ wear warm clothes Keys: 1.b; 2.a; 3.d; 4.c S1  S2 Example exchange: S1: I’m sick S2: You should go to the doctor 3/ EXPRESSING “LIKE” & “DISLIKE”_P164-165: Structures of talking about hobbies ASK ANSWER I’d like… I prefer… -What would you like to eat? I don’t really like… -What would you like? No, I don’t like… -Would you like…? Yes. That’s sounds nice. Example exchange: S1: What would you like to eat? S2: I’d like spring rolls 4/ BECAUSE-5_P166-167: COLOR REASON 1/ blue a/ warm 2/ pink b/ lucky 3/ red c/ peaceful Keys: 1.c; 2.a; 3.b Example exchange: S1: What is your favorite color?. - Do individually. - Corection. - Pair work - Do individually. - Corection. - Pair work. - Do individually. - Corection. - Pair work. - Do individually. - Corection. - Pair work.

(256) S2: Red S1: Why? S2: Because it is lucky III/ Tenses - Retell the form, use and the way to find the tense * Past: last week, yesterday…… * Present: everyday, sometimes….. * Future: tomorrow, next week… 3. Consolidation: 2' - Retell the important points of the lesson. 4. Homework: 1' - Learn the structures by heart. - Do exercises. - Prepare for the test of the second term.. Give out.. Write down. Ngày soạn: 05/5/2016 Ngày dạy: 11/5/2016 TIẾT 102 Revision for the second semester I. Objectives -Further practice in adjs & advs, modal verbs, expressing ideas -By the end of the lesson students will be able to II. Teaching aids Textbook, poster, cassette, tape, sub-board III. Procedures I. choose the best answer: 1. After class, Nam goes home and ________ videos. a. watch b. watching c. watches d. to watch 2. A running nose , a slight fever, coughing and sneezing are the __ of the common cold. a. symptoms b. diseases c. sickness d. illness 3. Sugar gives us __________ and we fell less hungry. a. power b. health c. energy d. happy 4. Is your __________ one meter forty centimeters? a. weight b. height c. body d. tall 5. Ha likes candy. ______ do we. a. Neither b. so c. either d. too 6. Let’s ___________ to the zoo. a. gone b. going c .go d. to go 7. He is a good teacher. He teaches very ______________. a. bad b. well c. good d. fast 8. General Giap’s Forces defeated the ________ in 1954. a. American b. French c. Japanese d. China 9. Millions of young people play____________________. a. chess b. musical instrument c. video games d. football.

(257) 10. We can learn more about the undersea world thanks to Jacques Cousteau’s __ a. action b. invention c. composition d. introduction II. Read the text and answer the question: In the summer holidays, Mr Hung, Mrs Chi and their children, Tuan and Hoa often go to the beach for two or three days. They always go to Vung Tau in the south of Vietnam. They usually stay in a small house or a flat by the sea, but sometimes they stay in a hotel. Last summer, they went to Nha Trang. They stayed at sunshine hotel for three days. In the morning, Tuan played football with his father on the beach. Hoa and her mother walked along the beach and built sandcastles. They visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium and saw different kinds of fish there. They also bought a lots of souvenirs for friends. 1. Where does Hoa’s family often go for their summer holidays ? ................... 2. How long do they often stay there? ........................................................... 3. Where do they usually stay ? ....................... 4. Where did they go last summer? ......................................................... 5. What did Hoa and her mother do there in the morning? ..................................................................... 6. What did they see at Tri Nguyen Aquarium? ...................................................................................... III. Rewrite the following sentences, use the correct form of the words in brackets: 1. Mary can’t hear you. I can’t hear you ( neither). .............................................................................. 2. I saw that film last night. He saw that film last night. (too) ........................................................................ 3. The boys in my class are good players. They play soccer very (good). .............................................................................. 4. They (buy) a lot of souvenirs for their parents yesterday. ......................................................................... 5. Nam (not do) his homework at the moment. .............................................................. WEEK 37: Period 103+104 Preparing date : 12/05/2016 Teaching date: 16,17/05/2016 Revision for the second semester I. Objectives - Help ss to review the knowledge of the second semester - Drill by doing exercises THEORY: 1. Tense: - The Present Simple Tense - The Future Simple Tense - The Present Progressive Tense.

(258) - The Simple Past Tense 2. WH question ( what/ where/ how/ why…) 3. Too/ so/ neither/ either 4. Adjectives/ adverbs 5. Modal verbs ( must/ ought to/ should…) 6. Sequencing: first, next, then, finally 7. Indefinite quantifiers: a little, a lot/ lots of, too much 8. Suggestions: Why don't…?/ What about…?/ let's…. 9. Prepositions 10. Using: like/ prefer. Vocabularies from Unit 9 to Unit 15. II. EXERCISES: I. Choose the correct answer to fill the blanks: 1. We _____ Ha Long Bay last summer vactation.a. are visiting b. will visit c. visit d. visited 2. When they _____ children, they often played with each other. a. were b. was c.will be d. are 3. He _____ in Ha Noi for ten years, now he _____ in HCM city. a. lived/ is living b. lives/ will live c. lived/ will live d. lives/ is living 4. Her dress looked _____. She seemed very _____ about it. a. beautiful/ happily b. beautifully/ happy c. beautiful/ happy d. beautifully/ happily 5. It's time for them to open the presents.a. gifts b. envelops c. boxes d. packets 6. What's wrong _____ you? You look ill. a. to b. for c. about d. with 7. It was a green skirt with white flowers _____ it. a. in b. on c. at d. for 8. _____ a nice dress.a. How b. Where c. What d. Which 9. The weather _____ nice yesterday.a. were b. was c. is d. are 10. How _____ is it from Hue to Da Nang?a. long b. big c. far d. wide 11. Don't worry he _____ hoe to fill the cavity in your tooth very well. a. know b. is knowing c. knows d. knew 12. _____ you follow me to the doctor's Thu's surgery please? a. should b. can c. would d. must 13. Does your younger brother know how _____. a. take care of himself b. to take care of himself c. to take care of herself d. take care of herself 14. Fish isn't my favorite food and _____ is beef. a. either b. too c. neither d. so 15. I like branges very much. What about you, Mai and Nam? a. so do we b. so do they c. we like it, either d. I like it, too 16. We prefer to watch TV _____ chess. a. to play b. than to play c. than playing d. than play 17. I prefer watching TV _____ video games..

(259) a. to playing b. than playing c. than to play d. to play 18. I think all children _____ of their own age. a. should play outdoors and with people b. may play outdoors and with people c. should play outdoors and by people d. can play outdoors and with people 19. I received a letter _____ your aunt last week.a. of b. to c. for d. from 20. Are you scared _____ seeing the dentist?a. of b. on c. in d. at 21. You must drink _____ water everyday.a. much b. many c. a few d. little 22. Stop please. That is too _____ coffee.a. many b. a lot of c. much d. little 23. Mr. Robinson speaks Vietnamese very _____. a. fluently b. skillfully c. good d. skillful 24. There's a good film on at Fansland Theater _____ you like to see it with me? a. Do b. Will c. Did d. Would 25. It was extremely _____ of you to leave your library books on the bus. a. carelessly b. carefully c. careful d. carelessly II. Supply the correct form or tense of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Mr Nam never ( go ) _____ to bed before 10 o'clock. 2. Geogre Bush's speech ( be ) _____ broadcast on TV tonight. 3. Brazin ( win ) _____ the last Football World cup. 4. Don't forget ( turn off ) _____ lights before going out. 5. She prefers ( socialize ) _____ with her friends. 6. Many years ago, most people in Viet Nam ( not have ) _____ TV sets. 7. They ( perform ) _____ " Remeo and Juliet" last sunday. 8. The children must ( be ) _____ back by six o'clock. 9. I hope ( visit ) _____ you in Ha Noi soon. 10. It stopped ( hurt ) _____ afterwards. 11. He ( not come ) _____ to the meeting last week. 12. My mother ( plant ) _____ flowers in the gerden at the moment. 13. I ( be ) _____ busy last night, so I ( miss ) _____ a good film on TV. 14. We ( travel ) _____ to Hue next month. 15. hoa ( lose ) _____ her pen at school yesterday. 16. He ( tell ) _____ the news to everybody in the village a few days ago. 17. They ( play ) _____ volleyball on the beach at present. 18. According to the weather forecast. It ( rain ) _____ tomorrow. 19. What you ( do ) _____ now? - I ( polish ) _____ my shoes. 20. Water ( boil ) _____ at 1000C III. Fill in the blanks with right prepositions: 1. My father arrived ____ Ha Noi _____ 5 o'clock _____ the morninìng. 2. They talked _____ Mr Phong _____ their vacation _____ Dalat. 3. Who is the girl _____ the blue dress? - She's a cousin of mine..

(260) 4. The teacher asks him a question _____ Biology. 5. Lan has a dress _____ yellow flowers ____ it. 6. Would you like to live ____ a big city? 7. I'm hurry. What's _____ dinner this evening? 8. She spends too much money _____ clothes. 9. The number _____ participants increases every week. 10. A nurse takes care _____ sick people. 11. Did you see the program _____ computers _____ TV last night. 12. Very few Vietnamese people had TV sets _____ 1960s. 13. Some people garthered outside the house and watched TV _____ the windows. 14. There aren't many good programs _____ teenagers. 15. life in the city is different _____ life in the country. 16. Hoa usually goes _____ the public library _____ bike. 17. The noise keeps me awake _____ night. 18. I'm really interested _____ history. 19. Are you very good _____ English? 20. They don't depend _____ tourism to live. IV. Make Wh- questions for the underlined words: 1. I'd like to see a cowboy movie. 2. Nga is going to visit her old teachers this evening.? 3. I'd love to. I really like detective movie.? 4. Nam's brother went to tne dentist yesterday because he had a terrible toothache.? 5. I had beef, rice and lecture for dinner last night?? 6. I want half a kilo of spinach.? 7. The children enjoy watching advertisement on TV?? 8. We met her at the City's theater last night?? 9. He had an appointment at 10:30.? 10. They travelled to the USA by plane last month?? V. Match sentences in column A to sentences in column B: 1. I was absent from school yesterday. a. No, You can't 2. What kinds of programs do you like? b. So does my brother 3. Who helped her make the dress? c. Yes, It's good for health. 4. How much does it cost? d. I'll visit Ha Long Bay. 5. What will you do on your next vacation? e. about twice a week. 6. What would you like? f. Yes, I'd love to. 7. Can I watch TV now? g. because I was sick. 8. What sports do you like best? h. No, thanks. I'm not thirsty. 9. Mai gets bad marks at Math i. 1.50 meters 10. Nam likes swimming. j. I like pop music 11. Would you like something to drink? k. Ten thousand dong. 12. Do you like oranges Juice? l. Her mother 13. What's his weight? m. She ought to study harder. 14. how often do you go? n. I'd like some chicken and rice. 15. Would you like to go to the drama club with me tonight? o. Badminton VI. Put the words in their correct order to make sentences: 1. sister/ with/ yesterday/ helped/ the/ my/ homework/ me.

(261) 2. holiday/ did/ summer/ on /go/ where/ last/ you/? 3. dinner/ in/ some/ I/ restaurant/ with/ a/ had/ friends/ Chinese. 4. chicken/ likes/ and/ does/ so/ Mai/ Hoa. 5. badminton/ today/ becomes/ very/ popular/ activity/ sports 6. to/ have/ finish/ homework/ my/ now/ I 7. Minh?/ program/ which/ do/ prefer/ you 8. in/ party/ to/ would/ like/ join/ brithday/ Mai?/ you/ my 9. am/ going/ center/ video/ to/ games/ I/ amusement/ play/ to/ the 10. on/ should/ spend/ not/ you/ time/ video/ much/ games. VII. Complete each sentence so that the meaning stays the same: 1. She is not a quick runner. -> She does ………………. 2. What is the matter with Minh? -> What is…………………….. 3. My father is a careful driver. -> My father drives…………… 4. I like video games better than computer games. -> I prefer……………………………… 5. Let's go to the amusement center. -> Why don't………………………….. 6. Reading is more boring than watching TV. -> Watching TV is more……………………… 7. How high is that building? -> What……………………. 8. No one can swim more quickly than him. -> He is…………………………. 9. Basketball is my favorite sport. -> The sport………………………. 10. Mai forgets to do the homework and I did, too. -> Mai didn't……………………………. VIII. Read. Then answer the questions 1. Hi, I am Nam and I am the goal keeper in my school's football team. Many people like football more than everything. To play football, people must be divided into two teams of eleven players, using a round ball and a pitch with two goals. My team often practice on the school football ground and sometimes play against the teams of other schools in competitions. Our team always play well so we often win those teams. I am very proud of my school's football team. a. What does Nam do in his school's football team? b. How do many people like football? c. What do people need to play football? d. What do Nam's team often do? e. Why do Nam's team often win the teams of other schools? f. How does Nam feel about his school's football team? 2. I am Chi and I am Miss Loan's neighbour. She is a dressmaker. Many people come to her shop to have a dress made by her. Yesterday she made a dress for me. First, she meansured me and then she took out a sheet of beautiful cloth and cut it into a nice dress. After thet she sewed the dress on her sewing machine. She did the work very.

(262) quickly. After about one hour of working, she made a very beautiful dressf for me. Now I am very happy with my new and beautiful dress. a. What's Miss Loan's job? b. What did Miss Loan do yesterday? c. What did she do frist? d. What did she do after that? e. How long did she do after thet? f. Is Chi very happy with her new and beautiful dress now? 3. The frist stamp in the world was an English stamp. It was made in 1840. Before that, people paid money to the postman for every letter that they received and the postmen did not give the letters to anybody who did not pay him. An English teacher, whose name was Rowland Hill, thought much about this. One day, he said that the people who wrote the letter should pay for them, and not the people who got the letters. He then spoke about it to the people in the government. Soon, the post office began to sell little pieces of paper with a stamp on them. a. Which country made the first stamp? b. When did the first stamp appear? c. Before that, what did people have to do when they got a letter? d. Did people get the letter if they refuses to pay? e. Who invented the stamp? 4. During the week-end I traveled by air for the first time in my life. I generally travel by train or bus. It is both cheaper and safer. But this was a short journey. At the beginning I did not feel very happy. This feeling did not last long. The trip was very exciting. I was soon high up in the sky among the clouds. The view of mountains, fields and rivers was interesting and unusual. I enjoyed my short and comfortable hourney very much. a.When did you first travel by air? b. How do you generally travel? c. Why do you generally travel by train or bus? d. Why did you choose to travel by air this time? e. How did you feel at first? f. What was the trip like? g. How was the view of mountains, fields, rivers? h. How do you enjoy the journey?. WEEK 37: Period 105 Preparing date : 13/05/2016 Teaching date: 18/05/2016 the second semester test I. Aims - Check the Ss’ knowledge - Find out the part knowledge that Ss haven’t understood II. Preparation - Write the test III. Test Full name: ............................. the second semester test.

(263) I. Choose the word that has underlined part pronounced differently from the others. (1m) 1. a. become b. other c. once d. often 2. a. helped b. borrowed c. liked d. booked 3. a. chopstick b. touch c. catch d. stomach 4. a. serious b. symptom c. sugar. d. sauce II. Choose the best answer to complete the following sentences(2ms) 1: She is a ......................... girl. A. care B. carelessly C. carefully D. careless 2: Did Liz ................................. any gifts in Nha Trang? A. buys B. bought C. buy D. to buy 3: How ...................... is she? She is 40 kilos. A. heavy B. high C. weight D. height 4: We enjoy ................................. soccer. A. played B. to play C. play D. playing 5: What kinds of ................... do you like? – I like programs about teenagers. A. films B. programs C. books D. music 6: ....................... swimming? That’s OK. A. Let’s B. How about C. Shall we D. Will we 7: I am a teacher and she is, ............................. . A. either B. neither C. too D. so 8: What would you like .....................? – Cowboy movies. A. to watch B. to play C. to listen to D. to read III/ Supply the correct verb form (2ms ) 1. Would you like (go)…………………..out for a walk? 2. My sister (buy)………………….a new shirt two days ago. 3. Mai’s mother is clever. She usually (make)………………..lovely things. 4. Children mustn’t (smoke)……………..cigarettes. IV/ Match the questions in column A with the suitable answers in column B ( 1m) A B 1. Why were you absent yesterday? a. She had a toothache. 2. What was wrong with Linh? b. No, I didn’t. 3. What would you like to see? c. I’d like to see detective movies. 4. Did you visit Tri Nguyen d. Because I was sick. aquarium? 1 -………….2 -…………3 -…………..4 -………… V/ Read the text and do the exercise below (2ms ) Last summer Mr. Hung, Mrs. Chi and their children Tuan and Hoa went to Nha Trang . They stayed at Sunshine Hotel for three days . In the morning Tuan played football with his father on the beach. Hoa and her mother walked along the beach and built sandcastles. They visited Tri Nguyen aquarium and saw different kinds of fish there . They also bought a lot of souvenirs for friends. 1. T / F statements (1ms) ………a. Last summer they went to Nha Trang..

(264) ………b. They stayed at Bamboo Hotel. ………c. Tuan and his father played football in the afternoon. ………d. They saw different kinds of fish in Tri Nguyen aquarium. 2. Answer the questions (1m) a. How long did they stay at Sunshine Hotel? ………………………………………………………………………… b. Did they buy a lot of souvenirs for friends? ………………………………………………………………………… VI. Rewrite the following sentences so that it has the same meaning as the first one. (2ms) 1. My friend likes tennis better than badminton. My friend prefers………………………………………………………… 2. She swims well. She is a…………………………………………………...………………. 3. You shouldn’t eat too much candy You’d ………………………………………………..………………….. 4. They like soccer. We like soccer. They like soccer and so ………………………………….……………….

(265) I. II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences 1D, 2C, 3A, 4D, 5B, 6B, 7C, 8A III. Give the correct form of the nerb in brackets 1. To go, 2 bought, 3makes, 4 smoke IV. Match 1d, 2a, 3c, 4b V. Read the text 1 T, 2F, 3F, 4T 1 They stayed at Shunshine Hotel for 3 days 2 Yes, they did VI. Rewrite 3. she prefers tennis to badminton 4. She is a good swimmer. 5. You’d better not eat too much candy 6. so d we I. Choose the word.. 1d. 2. b. 3d. 4c.

(266)

(267)

giao an anh 7

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về